YASKAWA AC Drive-J1000: Quick Start Guide

COSMOS140182CI 2011.
YASKAWA AC Drive-J1000
Compact V/f Control Drive
Quick Start Guide

Type: CIMR-JU
Models: 200 V Class, Three-Phase Input: 0.1 to 5.5 kW
200 V Class, Single-Phase Input: 0.1 to 2.2 kW
400 V Class, Three-Phase Input: 0.2 to 5.5 kW
To properly use the product, read this manual thoroughly and retain
for easy reference, inspection, and maintenance. Ensure the end user
receives this manual.
MANUAL NO. TOEP C710606 26D
Receiving
Mechanical Installation
Electrical Installation
Start-Up Programming &

Operation
Troubleshooting
Periodic Inspection &

Maintenance
Peripheral Devices &

Options
Specifications
Parameter List
Standards Compliance
Copyright 2008 YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system,
or transmitted, in any form or by any means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording,
or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Yaskawa. No patent liability is assumed
with respect to the use of the information contained herein. Moreover, because Yaskawa is
constantly striving to improve its high-quality products, the information contained in this
manual is subject to change without notice. Every precaution has been taken in the preparation
of this manual. Yaskawa assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions. Neither is any
liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained in this
publication.
Table of Contents
i.
PREFACE & GENERAL SAFETY ........................9

i.1
Preface .................................................................. 10
Applicable Documentation ..........................................10
Symbols..................................................................10
Terms and Abbreviations............................................10
i.2
General Safety ....................................................... 11

Supplemental Safety Information..................................11
Safety Messages ......................................................12
Drive Label Warnings ................................................15
Warranty Information .................................................16
Quick Reference.......................................................16
1. RECEIVING .........................................................17
1.1 Section Safety........................................................ 18
1.2 Model Number and Nameplate Check.................... 19
Nameplate...............................................................19
1.3 Component Names ................................................ 22

IP20/Open-Chassis ...................................................22
Front Views .............................................................24
2. MECHANICAL INSTALLATION .........................25

YASKAWA ELECTRIC TOEP C710606 26D YASKAWA AC Drive J1000 Quick Start Guide
Table of Contents
2.1 Section Safety.................................................................. 26

2.2 Mechanical Installation .................................................... 29
Installation Environment ....................................................... 29
Installation Orientation and Spacing........................................ 30
Exterior and Mounting Dimensions ......................................... 32
3. ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION.................................... 35
3.1 Section Safety.................................................................. 36
3.2 Standard Connection Diagram......................................... 39
3.3 Main Circuit Connection Diagram .................................... 42
Single-Phase 200 V Class Models BA0001 to BA0010 ............... 42
Three-Phase 200 V Class Models 2A0001 to 2A0020
Three-Phase 400 V Class Models 4A0001 to 4A0011 ............... 42
3.4 Terminal Block Configuration.......................................... 43

3.5 Protective Covers ............................................................ 44
IP20/Open-Chassis Cover Removal and Installation................... 44
3.6 Main Circuit Wiring .......................................................... 46

Main Circuit Terminal Functions ............................................. 46
Wire Gauges and Tightening Torques ..................................... 46
Main Circuit Terminal Power Supply and Motor Wiring................ 49
3.7 Control Circuit Wiring ...................................................... 52

Control Circuit Terminal Block Functions.................................. 53
Terminal Configuration......................................................... 54
Wiring Procedure ................................................................ 56
3.8 I/O Connections ............................................................... 59

Sinking/Sourcing Mode Switch............................................... 59
3.9 Main Frequency Reference .............................................. 62

DIP Switch S1 Analog Input Signal Selection ............................ 62
3.10 Braking Resistor.............................................................. 64

Installation......................................................................... 64
3.11 Interlocking with Connected Machinery .......................... 66

Drive Ready Signal ............................................................. 66
3.12 Wiring Checklist .............................................................. 67

4
Table of Contents
4. START-UP PROGRAMMING & OPERATION............. 69

4.1 Section Safety.................................................................. 70
4.2 Using the Digital LED Operator........................................ 73
Keys, Displays, and LEDs..................................................... 73
Digital Text Display ............................................................. 75
LED Screen Displays........................................................... 76
LO/RE LED and RUN LED Indications .................................... 76
Menu Structure for Digital LED Operator.................................. 78
4.3 The Drive and Programming Modes ................................ 79

Navigating the Drive and Programming Modes.......................... 80
Changing Parameter Settings or Values .................................. 83
Verifying Parameter Changes: Verify Menu .............................. 84
Switching Between LOCAL and REMOTE................................ 85
Parameters Available in the Setup Group................................. 86
4.4 Start-up Flowchart ........................................................... 87

Flowchart: Basic Start-up...................................................... 87
4.5 Basic Operation ............................................................... 88

Initialize Parameter Values: A1-03.......................................... 88
Frequency Reference Source: b1-01....................................... 88
Run Command Input Selection: b1-02 ..................................... 90
Stopping Method Selection: b1-03 .......................................... 92
Acceleration/Deceleration: C1-01 to C1-04............................... 93
Drive Duty and Carrier Frequency Selection: C6-01 and C6-02 .... 95
Multi-Step Speed Operation (4-Step Speed) ............................. 97
E1: V/f Characteristics ....................................................... 101
Motor Parameters: E2-01 to E2-03 ....................................... 104
Digital Output: H2-01 ......................................................... 105
Analog Outputs: H4-01 to H4-03 .......................................... 105
Motor Protection: L1-01 and L1-02 ....................................... 107
Drive Status Monitors: U1-01 to U4-13 .................................. 110
4.6 Powering Up the Drive ....................................................112

Powering Up the Drive and Operation Status Display ............... 112
V/f Pattern Setting............................................................. 113
4.7 No-Load Operation Test Run ..........................................114

No-Load Operation Test Run............................................... 114
Table of Contents
4.8 Test Run with Load Connected.......................................116

Test Run with the Load Connected ....................................... 116
4.9 Verifying and Backing Up Parameter Settings................117

Parameter Access Level: A1-01 ........................................... 117
Password Settings: A1-04, A1-05 ......................................... 117
Copy Function (Optional).................................................... 117
4.10 Test Run Checklist .........................................................119
5. TROUBLESHOOTING ............................................... 121

5.1 Section Safety.................................................................122
5.2 Motor Performance Fine Tuning .....................................125
Parameters for Tuning the Drive .......................................... 125
Motor Hunting and Oscillation Control Parameters ................... 126
5.3 Drive Alarms, Faults, and Errors.....................................127

Types of Alarms, Faults, and Errors ...................................... 127
Alarm and Error Displays.................................................... 128
5.4 Fault Detection ...............................................................130

Fault Displays, Causes, and Possible Solutions ...................... 130
5.5 Alarm Detection ..............................................................141

Alarm Codes, Causes, and Possible Solutions ........................ 141
5.6 Operator Programming Errors ........................................147

oPE Codes, Causes, and Possible Solutions .......................... 147
5.7 Diagnosing and Resetting Faults....................................149

Fault Occurs Simultaneously with Power Loss ........................ 149
If the Drive Still has Power After a Fault Occurs ...................... 149
Viewing Fault History Data After Fault ................................... 149
Fault Reset Methods ......................................................... 150
5.8 Troubleshooting without Fault Display...........................151

Cannot Change Parameter Settings...................................... 151
Motor Does Not Rotate Properly after Pressing RUN Button or
after Entering External Run Command ................................. 152
6. PERIODIC INSPECTION & MAINTENANCE ........... 161

6.1 Section Safety.................................................................162
6
Table of Contents
6.2 Inspection.......................................................................165
Recommended Daily Inspection........................................... 165
Recommended Periodic Inspection....................................... 166
6.3 Periodic Maintenance .....................................................168

Replacement Parts............................................................ 168
6.4 Drive Cooling Fans .........................................................171

Number of Cooling Fans..................................................... 171
Cooling Fan Replacement .................................................. 172
7. PERIPHERAL DEVICES & OPTIONS ...................... 177

7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
Section Safety.................................................................178
Drive Options and Peripheral Devices ............................180
Connecting Peripheral Devices ......................................182
Installing Peripheral Devices ..........................................184
Installing a Molded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB) and Earth
Leakage Circuit Breaker (ELCB) ......................................... 184
Application Precautions when Installing a GFCI....................... 185
Installing a Magnetic Contactor ............................................ 185
Connecting an AC Reactor or DC Link Choke ......................... 186
Connecting a Surge Suppressor .......................................... 187
Connecting a Noise Filter ................................................... 187
EMC Filter Installation........................................................ 190
Zero-Phase Reactor .......................................................... 190
Installing Fuses on the Input Side......................................... 191
Attachment for External Heatsink ......................................... 191
Noise Filter Installation....................................................... 191
Installing a Motor Thermal Overload (oL) Relay on the Drive
Output........................................................................... 191
NEMA Type 1 Kit .............................................................. 193
7.5 Options ...........................................................................198

Interface Options .............................................................. 198
Other Options .................................................................. 198
A. SPECIFICATIONS...................................................... 199
A.1 Heavy Duty and Normal Duty Ratings.............................200
Table of Contents
A.2
A.3
A.4
A.5
A.6
Single/Three-Phase 200 V Class Drives ..........................201

Three-Phase 400 V Class Drives .....................................203
Drive Specifications........................................................205
Drive Watt Loss Data ......................................................209
Drive Derating Data.........................................................211
Temperature Derating........................................................ 211
Altitude Derating ............................................................... 212
B. PARAMETER LIST .................................................... 213

B.1 Parameter Groups ..........................................................214
B.2 Parameter Table..............................................................215
A: Initialization Parameters ................................................. 215
b: Application ................................................................... 216
C: Tuning ........................................................................ 217
d: References .................................................................. 220
E: Motor Parameters ......................................................... 222
H Parameters: Multi-Function Terminals ................................ 223
L: Protection Function ........................................................ 229
n: Advanced Performance Set-Up ........................................ 233
o: Operator Related Parameters .......................................... 233
U: Monitors...................................................................... 235
B.3 Defaults by Drive Model and Duty Rating ND/HD............238
C. STANDARDS COMPLIANCE .................................... 241

C.1 Section Safety.................................................................242
C.2 European Standards .......................................................245
CE Low Voltage Directive Compliance .................................. 245
EMC Guidelines Compliance............................................... 248
C.3 UL Standards..................................................................254
UL Standards Compliance .................................................. 254
Drive Motor Overload Protection .......................................... 260
INDEX ......................................................................... 263
i
Preface & General
Safety
This section provides safety messages pertinent to this product
that, if not heeded, may result in fatality, personal injury, or
equipment damage. Yaskawa is not responsible for the
consequences of ignoring these instructions.
i.1
i.2
PREFACE.........................................................10
GENERAL SAFETY...........................................11
i.1 Preface
i.1
Preface
Yaskawa manufactures products used as components in a wide variety of industrial systems

and equipment. The selection and application of Yaskawa products remain the responsibility
of the equipment manufacturer or end user. Yaskawa accepts no responsibility for the way its
products are incorporated into the final system design. Under no circumstances should any
Yaskawa product be incorporated into any product or design as the exclusive or sole safety
control. Without exception, all controls should be designed to detect faults dynamically and
fail safely under all circumstances. All systems or equipment designed to incorporate a product
manufactured by Yaskawa must be supplied to the end user with appropriate warnings and
instructions as to the safe use and operation of that part. Any warnings provided by Yaskawa
must be promptly provided to the end user. Yaskawa offers an express warranty only as to the
quality of its products in conforming to standards and specifications published in the Yaskawa
manual. NO OTHER WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, IS OFFERED. Yaskawa
assumes no liability for any personal injury, property damage, losses, or claims arising from
misapplication of its products.
u Applicable Documentation
The following manuals are available for J1000 series drives:
J1000 Series Compact V/f Control Drive Quick Start Guide
Read this manual first. This guide is packaged together with the product. It
contains basic information required to install and wire the drive. This guide
provides basic programming and simple setup and adjustment. Refer to the
J1000 Technical Manual for complete descriptions of drive features and
functions.
J1000 Series Compact V/f Control Drive Technical Manual
This manual describes installation, wiring, operation procedures, functions,
troubleshooting, maintenance, and inspections to perform before operation.
u Symbols
Note:
TERMS
Indicates a supplement or precaution that does not cause drive damage.
Indicates a term or definition used in this manual.
u Terms and Abbreviations
10
Drive: Yaskawa J1000 Series Drive

r/min: Revolutions per Minute
SI-485/J: RS-422/RS-485 Interface for MEMOBUS/Modbus Communication
V/f: V/f Control
i.2 General Safety
i.2
General Safety
u Supplemental Safety Information

General Precautions
The diagrams in this manual may be indicated without covers or safety shields to show details. Restore
covers or shields before operating the drive and run the drive according to the instructions described
in this manual.
Any illustrations, photographs, or examples used in this manual are provided as examples only and
may not apply to all products to which this manual is applicable.
The products and specifications described in this manual or the content and presentation of the manual
may be changed without notice to improve the product and/or the manual.
When ordering a new copy of the manual due to damage or loss, contact your Yaskawa representative
or the nearest Yaskawa sales office and provide the manual number shown on the front cover.
If nameplate becomes worn or damaged, order a replacement from your Yaskawa representative or
the nearest Yaskawa sales office.
WARNING
Read and understand this manual before installing, operating or servicing this drive. The
drive must be installed according to this manual and local codes.
The following conventions are used to indicate safety messages in this manual. Failure to
heed these messages could result in serious or possibly even fatal injury or damage to the
products or to related equipment and systems.
DANGER
Indicates a hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious
injury.
WARNING
Indicates a hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious
injury.
WARNING! will also be indicated by a bold key word embedded in the text followed by an italicized safety
message.
11
i.2 General Safety
CAUTION
Indicates a hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, could result in minor or
moderate injury.
CAUTION! will also be indicated by a bold key word embedded in the text followed by an italicized safety
message.
NOTICE
Indicates a property damage message.
NOTICE: will also be indicated by a bold key word embedded in the text followed by an italicized safety
message.
u Safety Messages
DANGER
Heed the safety messages in this manual.
Failure to comply will result in death or serious injury.
The operating company is responsible for any injuries or equipment damage resulting from
failure to heed the warnings in this manual.
Electrical Shock Hazard

Do not connect or disconnect wiring while the power is on.
Before servicing, disconnect all power to the equipment. The internal capacitor remains
charged even after the power supply is turned off. The charge indicator LED will extinguish
when the DC bus voltage is below 50 Vdc. To prevent electric shock, wait at least one minute
after all indicators are OFF and measure the DC bus voltage level to confirm safe level.
12
i.2 General Safety
WARNING
Sudden Movement Hazard
System may start unexpectedly upon application of power, resulting in death or serious
injury.
Clear all personnel from the drive, motor and machine area before applying power. Secure
covers, couplings, shaft keys and machine loads before applying power to the drive.

Do not attempt to modify or alter the drive in any way not explained in this manual.
Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.
Yaskawa is not responsible for any modification of the product made by the user. This
product must not be modified.
Do not allow unqualified personnel to use equipment.
Maintenance, inspection, and replacement of parts must be performed only by authorized
personnel familiar with installation, adjustment and maintenance of AC drives.
Do not remove covers or touch circuit boards while the power is on.
Fire Hazard
Do not use an improper voltage source.
Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury by fire.
Verify that the rated voltage of the drive matches the voltage of the incoming power supply
before applying power.
Crush Hazard
Do not use this drive in lifting applications without installing external safety circuitry
to prevent accidental dropping of the load.
The drive does not possess built-in load drop protection for lifting applications.
Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury from falling loads.
Install electrical and/or mechanical safety circuit mechanisms independent of drive circuitry.
13
i.2 General Safety
CAUTION
Crush Hazard
Do not carry the drive by the front cover.
Failure to comply may result in minor or moderate injury from the main body of the drive
falling.
NOTICE
Observe proper electrostatic discharge procedures (ESD) when handling the drive and
circuit boards.
Failure to comply may result in ESD damage to the drive circuitry.
Never connect or disconnect the motor from the drive while the drive is outputting
voltage.
Improper equipment sequencing could result in damage to the drive.
Do not perform a withstand voltage test on any part of the drive.
Failure to comply could result in damage to the sensitive devices within the drive.
Do not operate damaged equipment.
Failure to comply could result in further damage to the equipment.
Do not connect or operate any equipment with visible damage or missing parts.
Install adequate branch circuit short circuit protection per applicable codes.
Failure to comply could result in damage to the drive.
The drive is suitable for circuits capable of delivering not more than 31,000 RMS
symmetrical Amperes, 240 Vac maximum (200 V Class) and 480 Vac maximum (400 V
Class).
Do not expose the drive to halogen group disinfectants.
Failure to comply may cause damage to the electrical components in the drive.
Do not pack the drive in wooden materials that have been fumigated or sterilized.
Do not sterilize the entire package after the product is packed.
14
i.2 General Safety
u Drive Label Warnings

Always heed the warning information listed in Figure i.1 in the position shown in Figure i.
2.
WARNING
Risk of electric shock.
Read manual before installing.

Wait 1 minute for capacitor discharge after
disconnecting power supply.
To conform to
requirements, make sure
to ground the supply neutral for 400V class.
Figure i.1 Warning Information
Warning
Label
Figure i.2 Warning Information Position
15
i.2 General Safety
u Warranty Information
n Restrictions
The drive was not designed or manufactured for use in devices or systems that may directly
affect or threaten human lives or health.
Customers who intend to use the product described in this manual for devices or systems
relating to transportation, health care, space aviation, atomic power, electric power, or in
underwater applications must first contact their Yaskawa representatives or the nearest
Yaskawa sales office.
This product has been manufactured under strict quality-control guidelines. However, if this
product is to be installed in any location where failure of this product could involve or result
in a life-and-death situation or loss of human life or in a facility where failure may cause a
serious accident or physical injury, safety devices must be installed to minimize the likelihood
of any accident.
u Quick Reference
Run a Motor of One-Frame Larger Capacity
When using this drive for variable torque loads such as fans and pumps, a motor one frame size larger can be used.
Know the Details of Safety Measures
The functions listed below affect the safe operation of the drive. Ensure that the settings fit the application requirements
prior to operation.
Safe operations. Run by power on. Parameter setting b1-17.
LED operator stop key priority selection. Parameter o2-02.
Enter press required after changing the keypad frequency reference. Parameter o2-05.
Operation interlock when program mode is selected. Parameter b1-08.
Refer to European Standards on page 245 and Refer to UL Standards on page
254.
16
1
Receiving
This chapter describes the proper inspections to perform after
receiving the drive and illustrates the different enclosure types
and components.
1.1
1.2
1.3
SECTION SAFETY.............................................18
MODEL NUMBER AND NAMEPLATE CHECK. . .19
COMPONENT NAMES.......................................22
17
1.1 Section Safety
1.1
Section Safety
CAUTION

Failure to comply may cause the main body of the drive to fall, resulting in minor or moderate
injury.
NOTICE
circuit boards.
A motor connected to a PWM drive may operate at a higher temperature than a utilityfed motor and the operating speed range may reduce motor cooling capacity.
Ensure that the motor is suitable for drive duty and/or the motor service factor is adequate
to accommodate the additional heating with the intended operating conditions.
18
1.2 Model Number and Nameplate Check
1.2
Model Number and Nameplate Check
Please perform the following tasks after receiving the drive:

Inspect the drive for damage.
If the drive appears damaged upon receipt, contact the shipper immediately.
Verify receipt of the correct model by checking the information on the nameplate.
If you have received the wrong model or the drive does not function properly, contact your
supplier.
u Nameplate
CIMR-J
MODEL :
MAX APPLI. MOTOR : 3.5A/3.0A REV : A
INPUT : AC3PH 200-240V 50 / 60Hz 2.7A / 1.4A
IND.CONT.EQ.
OUTPUT : AC3PH 0-240V 0-400Hz 1.2A / 0.8A
7J48
MASS : 0.9 kg
O/N
:
S/N
:
H
G
F
E
FILE NO : E131457
IP20
YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION
Receiving
A
I
PASS
MADE IN JAPAN
2-1 Kurosaki-shiroishi, Yahatanishi-Ku, Kitakyushu 806-0004 Japan
A Normal Duty Amps /

Heavy Duty Amps
B Software version
C Enclosure type
D Address <1>
F
G
H
I
Lot number
Output specifications
Input specifications
AC drive model
E Serial number
Figure 1.1 Nameplate Information Example
<1>
The address of the head office of Yaskawa Electric Corporation (responsible for product
liability) is shown on the nameplate.
19
CIMR - J U 2
Drive
J1000
Series
A
No.
A
No.
Region
Code
Japan
China
Europe
Asia
USA
Customized
Specifications
Standard model
0001
No. Enclosure Type

IP20/OpenChassis
No.
A
M
N
S
No.
B
Voltage Class
1-phase, 200-240 Vac
A A
Design
Revision
Order
Environmental
Specification <1>
Standard
Humidity- and
dust-resistant
Oil-resistant
Vibration-resistant
Refer to the tables below.
n Single-Phase 200 V
Normal Duty
Heavy Duty
No.
Max. Motor
Capacity kW
Rated Output
Current A
No.
Max. Motor
Capacity kW
Rated Output
Current A
0001
0.2
1.2
0001
0.1
0.8
0002
0.4
1.9
0002
0.2
1.6
0003
0.75
3.3
0003
0.4
3.0
0006
1.1
6.0
0006
0.75
5.0
0010
2.2
9.6
0010
1.5
8.0
n Three-Phase 200 V
Normal Duty
20
Heavy Duty
No.
Max Motor
Capacity kW
Rated Output
Current A
No.
Max Motor
Capacity kW
Rated Output
Current A
0001
0.2
1.2
0001
0.1
0.8
0002
0.4
1.9
0002
0.2
1.6
0004
0.75
3.5
0004
0.4
3.5
0006
1.1
6.0
0006
0.75
6.0
0010
2.2
9.6
0010
1.5
9.6
0012
3.0
12.0
0012
2.2
12.0
0020
5.5
19.6
0020
3.7
17.5
n Three-Phase 400 V
Normal Duty
No.
Max. Motor
Capacity kW
Heavy Duty
Rated Output
Current A
No.
Max. Motor
Capacity kW
Rated Output
Current A
0001
0.4
1.2
0001
0.2
1.2
0002
0.75
2.1
0002
0.4
1.8
0004
1.5
4.1
0004
0.75
3.4
0005
2.2
5.4
0005
1.5
4.8
3.0
6.9
0007
2.2
5.5
3.7
8.8
0009
3.0
7.2
0011
5.5
11.1
0011
3.7
9.2
Receiving
0007
0009
21
1.3 Component Names
1.3
Component Names
This section illustrates drive components in the IP20/Open-Chassis models.

Refer to NEMA Type 1 Kit on page 193 for information on using the NEMA Type 1 Kit
option to create a NEMA Type 1 rating.
u IP20/Open-Chassis
n Single-Phase AC 200 V BA0001B to BA0003B
Three-Phase AC 200 V 2A0001B to 2A0006B
K
J
A
I
H
B
F
G
C
E
A
B
C
D
E
F
Mounting hole
Heatsink
Cable cover
Terminal cover
Front cover screw
Option connector cover
D
G Front cover
H LED operator Refer to
Using the Digital LED
Operator on page 73
I Case
J Cooling fan <1>
K Fan cover <1>
Figure 1.2 Exploded View of IP20/Open-Chassis Type Components

(Model 2A0006B)
<1>
22
Models BA0001B to BA0003B and 2A0001B to 2A0004B do not have a cooling fan or a
cooling fan cover.
1.3 Component Names
n Single-Phase AC 200 V BA0006B to BA0010B

L
K
J
Receiving
I
B
1
G
C
D
F
A
B
C
D
E
F
Mounting hole
Heatsink
Cable cover
Terminal cover
Bottom cover
Front cover screw
E
G Option connector cover
H Front cover
I LED operator Refer to
Using the Digital LED
Operator on page 73
J Case
K Cooling fan <1>
L Fan cover <1>
Figure 1.3 Exploded view of IP20/Open-Chassis Type Components

(Model 2A0012B)
<1>
Models BA0006B and 4A0001B to 4A0004B do not have a cooling fan or a cooling fan cover.
23
1.3 Component Names
u Front Views
2A0006B
2A0012B
A
G
B
C
B
C
F
D
E
A DIP switch S1 Refer to
DIP Switch S1 Analog
Input Signal Selection on
page 62
B DIP switch S3 Refer to
Sinking/Sourcing Mode
Switch on page 59
C Control circuit terminal
Refer to Control Circuit
Wiring on page 52
D Main circuit terminal
Refer to Wiring the Main
Circuit Terminal on page
51
E
E Ground terminal
F Terminal cover
G Option unit connector
Refer to Options on page
198
Figure 1.4 Front Views of Drives
24
2
Mechanical
Installation
This chapter explains how to properly mount and install the
drive.
2.1
2.2
SECTION SAFETY.............................................26
MECHANICAL INSTALLATION..........................29
25
2.1 Section Safety
2.1
Section Safety
WARNING
Fire Hazard
Provide sufficient cooling with a fan or air conditioning unit when installing the drive
inside an enclosed panel or cabinet.
Failure to comply could result in overheating and fire.
The airflow over an IP20/Open-Chassis drive should be less than 50 C, while an IP20/
NEMA Type 1 drive using the NEMA Type 1 Kit option should have an airflow cooler than
40 C.
CAUTION
Crush Hazard
Failure to comply may result in minor or moderate injury from the main body of the drive
falling.
26
2.1 Section Safety
Observe proper electrostatic discharge (ESD) procedures when handling the drive.
Failure to comply could result in ESD damage to the drive circuitry.
It may be difficult to perform maintenance on the cooling fans of drives installed in a
vertical row inside an enclosure.
Ensure adequate spacing at the top of the drive to perform cooling fan replacement when
required.
Operating the motor in the low-speed range diminishes the cooling effects, increases
motor temperature, and may lead to motor damage by overheating.
Reduce the motor torque in the low-speed range whenever using a standard blower cooled
motor. If 100% torque is required continuously at low speed, consider using a special drive
or vector motor. Select a motor that is compatible with the required load torque and operating
speed range.
Do not operate motors above the maximum rated RPM.
Failure to comply may lead to bearing or other mechanical motor failures.
The speed range for continuous operation differs according to the lubrication method
and motor manufacturer.
If the motor is to be operated at a speed higher than the rated speed, consult with the
manufacturer.
Continuously operating an oil-lubricated motor in the low-speed range may result in burning.
27
NOTICE
2.1 Section Safety
NOTICE
When the wiring distance is greater than 100 meters, pay special attention to the motor
insulation voltage or use a drive-rated motor.
Failure to comply could lead to motor winding failure.
Motor vibration may increase when operating a machine in variable-speed mode, if
that machine previously operated at a constant speed.
Install vibration-proof rubber on the motor base or use the frequency jump function to skip
a frequency resonating the machine.
The motor may require more acceleration torque with drive operation than with a
commercial power supply.
Set a proper V/f pattern by checking the load torque characteristics of the machine to be
used with the motor.
The rated input current of submersible motors is higher than the rated input current
of standard motors.
Select an appropriate drive according to its rated output current. When the distance between
the motor and drive is long, use a cable thick enough to connect the motor to the drive to
prevent motor torque reduction.
When using an explosion-proof motor, it must be subject to an explosion-proof test in
conjunction with the drive.
This is also applicable when an existing explosion-proof motor is to be operated with the
drive. Since the drive itself is not explosion-proof, always install it in a safe place.
Do not use a drive for a single-phase motor.
Replace the motor with a three-phase motor.
If an oil-lubricated gearbox or speed reducer is used in the power transmission
mechanism, oil lubrication will be affected when the motor operates only in the low
speed range.
The power transmission mechanism will make noise and experience problems with service
life and durability if the motor is operated at a speed higher than the rated speed.
28
2.2 Mechanical Installation
2.2
This section outlines specifications, procedures, and environment for proper mechanical
installation of the drive.
u Installation Environment
To help prolong the optimum performance life of the drive, install the drive in the proper
environment. The table below provides a description of the appropriate environment for the
drive.
Conditions
Installation Area
Indoors
Ambient
Temperature
IP20/NEMA Type 1 enclosure: -10 C to +40 C (14 F to 104 F)

IP20/IP00 Open-Chassis enclosure: -10 C to +50 C (14 F to 122 F)
Finless Type: IP20 enclosure: -10 C to +50 C (14 F to 122 F)
Drive reliability improves in environments without wide temperature fluctuations.
When using an enclosure panel, install a cooling fan or air conditioner in the area to ensure
that the air temperature inside the enclosure does not exceed the specified levels.
Do not allow ice to develop on the drive.
Humidity
95% RH or less and free of condensation
Storage Temperature -20 C to +60 C (-4 F to +104 F)
Surrounding Area
Install the drive in an area free from:

oil mist and dust
metal shavings, oil, water or other foreign materials
radioactive materials
combustible materials (e.g., wood)
harmful gases and liquids
excessive vibration
chlorides
direct sunlight
Altitude
Up to 1000 meters without derating; up to 3000 meters with output current, ambient
temperature, and voltage derating.
Vibration
10 to 20 Hz at 9.8 m/s2
20 to 55 Hz at 5.9 m/s2
Orientation
Install the drive vertically to maintain maximum cooling effects.
NOTICE: Prevent foreign matter such as metal shavings or wire clippings from falling into the drive during
installation and project construction. Failure to comply could result in damage to the drive. Place a temporary
cover over the top of the drive during installation. Remove the temporary cover before startup, as the cover
will reduce ventilation and cause the drive to overheat.
NOTICE: Avoid placing drive peripheral devices, transformers, or other electronics near the drive. Failure to
comply could result in erroneous operation. If such devices must be used in close proximity to the drive, take
proper steps to shield the drive from noise.
Table 2.1 Installation Environment

Environment
29
u Installation Orientation and Spacing

Install the drive upright as illustrated in Figure 2.1 to maintain proper cooling.
A Correct
B Incorrect
Figure 2.1 Correct Installation Orientation
n Single Drive Installation

Figure 2.2 explains the required installation spacing to maintain sufficient space for airflow
and wiring. Install the heatsink against a closed surface to avoid diverting cooling air around
the heatsink.
Side Clearance
A
Top/Bottom Clearance
C
C
A 30 mm minimum
B Airflow direction
C 100 mm minimum
Figure 2.2 Correct Installation Spacing

Note:
30
The space required on the left and right sides of the drive are the same for IP20/Open-Chassis drives and
IP20/NEMA Type 1 drives using the NEMA Type 1 Kit option.
n Multiple Drive Installation

When installing multiple drives into the same enclosure panel, mount the drives according to
Figure 2.2. When mounting drives with a minimum side-by-side clearance of 2 mm according
to Figure 2.3, derating must be considered and parameter L8-35 must be set. Refer to
Parameter List on page 213.
2 mm
B
C
C
A Line up the tops of the
drives.
B 30 mm minimum
C 100 mm minimum
D Airflow direction
Figure 2.3 Space Between Drives (Side-by-Side Mounting)

Note:
When installing drives of different heights in the same enclosure panel, the tops of the drives should line
up. Leave space between the top and bottom of stacked drives for cooling fan replacement if required.
Using this method, it is possible to replace the cooling fans later.
31
u Exterior and Mounting Dimensions

Refer to NEMA Type 1 Kit on page 193 for exterior and mounting dimensions for drives
using the NEMA Type 1 Kit option.
n IP20/Open-Chassis Drives
Table 2.2 IP20/Open-Chassis (without an EMC filter)
D2
t1
2-M4
H2
H1
H
W1
D1
D
Voltage Class
Single-Phase
200 V Class
Three-Phase
200 V Class
32
Dimensions mm (in)
Drive
Model
W1
H1
H2
D1
D2
t1
Wt. kg
(lb.)
BA0001B
68
(2.7)
128
(5.0)
76
(3.0)
56
(2.2)
118
(4.6)
5
(0.2)
6.5
(0.3)
67.5
(2.7)
3
(0.1)
0.6
(1.3)
BA0002B
68
(2.7)
128
(5.0)
76
(3.0)
56
(2.2)
118
(4.6)
5
(0.2)
6.5
(0.3)
67.5
(2.7)
3
(0.1)
0.6
(1.3)
BA0003B
68
(2.7)
128
(5.0)
118
(4.6)
56
(2.2)
118
(4.6)
5
(0.2)
38.5
(1.5)
109.5
(4.3)
5
(0.2)
1.0
(2.2)
2A0001B
68
(2.7)
128
(5.0)
76
(3.0)
56
(2.2)
118
(4.6)
5
(0.2)
6.5
(0.3)
67.5
(2.7)
3
(0.1)
0.6
(1.3)
2A0002B
68
(2.7)
128
(5.0)
76
(3.0)
56
(2.2)
118
(4.6)
5
(0.2)
6.5
(0.3)
67.5
(2.7)
3
(0.1)
0.6
(1.3)
2A0004B
68
(2.7)
128
(5.0)
108
(4.3)
56
(2.2)
118
(4.6)
5
(0.2)
38.5
(1.5)
99.5
(3.9)
5
(0.2)
0.9
(2.0)
2A0006B
68
(2.7)
128
(5.0)
128
(5.0)
56
(2.2)
118
(4.6)
5
(0.2)
58.5
(2.3)
119.5
(4.7)
5
(0.2)
1.1
(2.4)

Table 2.3 IP20/Open-Chassis (without an EMC filter)
W1
D2
t1
H2
D1
D
Voltage Class
Single-Phase
200 V Class
Three-Phase
200 V Class
Dimensions mm (in)
Drive
Model
BA0006B
108
(4.3)
BA0010B
H1
H2
D1
D2
t1
Wt. kg
(lb.)
128 137.5 96
(5.0) (5.4) (3.8)
118
(4.6)
5
(0.2)
58
(2.3)
129
(5.1)
5
(0.2)
1.7
(3.8)
108
(4.3)
128
(5.0)
154
(6.1)
96
(3.8)
118
(4.6)
5
(0.2)
58 145.5
5
(2.3) (5.7) (0.2)
1.8
(4.0)
2A0010B
108
(4.3)
128
(5.0)
129
(5.1)
96
(3.8)
118
(4.6)
5
(0.2)
58 120.5
5
(2.3) (4.7) (0.2)
1.7
(3.8)
2A0012B
108
(4.3)
128 137.5 96
(5.0) 5.4 (3.8)
118
(4.6)
5
(0.2)
58
(2.3)
5
(0.2)
1.7
(3.8)
2A0020B
140
(5.5)
128
(5.0)
118
(4.6)
5
(0.2)
65 134.5
5
(2.6) (5.3) (0.2)
2.4
(5.3)
143
(5.6)
W1
128
(5.0)
129
(5.1)
33
H1
H
4-M4
W1
D2
H1
H
4-M4
t1
H2
D1
D
Voltage Class
Three-Phase
400 V Class
34
Dimensions mm (in)
Drive
Model
W1
H1
H2
D1
D2
t1
Wt. kg
(lb.)
4A0001B
108
(4.3)
128
(5.0)
81
(3.2)
96
(3.8)
118
(4.6)
5
(0.2)
10
(0.4)
72.5
(2.9)
5
(0.2)
1.0
(2.2)
4A0002B
108
(4.3)
128
(5.0)
99
(3.9)
96
(3.8)
118
(4.6)
5
(0.2)
28
(1.1)
90.5
(3.6)
5
(0.2)
1.2
(2.7)
4A0004B
108
(4.3)
128 137.5 96
(5.0) (5.4) (3.8)
118
(4.6)
5
(0.2)
58
(2.3)
129
(5.1)
5
(0.2)
1.7
(3.8)
4A0005B
108
(4.3)
128
(5.0)
154
(6.1)
96
(3.8)
118
(4.6)
5
(0.2)
58 145.5
5
(2.3) (5.7) (0.2)
1.7
(3.8)
4A0007B
108
(4.3)
128
(5.0)
154
(6.1)
96
(3.8)
118
(4.6)
5
(0.2)
58 145.5
5
(2.3) (5.7) (0.2)
1.7
(3.8)
4A0009B
108
(4.3)
128
(5.0)
154
(6.1)
96
(3.8)
118
(4.6)
5
(0.2)
58 145.5
5
(2.3) (5.7) (0.2)
1.7
(3.8)
4A0011B
140
(5.5)
128
(5.0)
143
(5.6
128
(5.0)
118
(4.6)
5
(0.2)
65 134.5
5
(2.6) (5.3) (0.2)
2.4
(5.3)
3
Electrical
Installation
This chapter explains proper procedures for wiring the control
circuit terminals, motor and power supply.
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
3.10
3.11
SECTION SAFETY.............................................36
STANDARD CONNECTION DIAGRAM...............39
MAIN CIRCUIT CONNECTION DIAGRAM..........42
TERMINAL BLOCK CONFIGURATION..............43
PROTECTIVE COVERS.....................................44
MAIN CIRCUIT WIRING.....................................46
CONTROL CIRCUIT WIRING.............................52
I/O CONNECTIONS...........................................59
MAIN FREQUENCY REFERENCE......................62
BRAKING RESISTOR........................................64
INTERLOCKING WITH CONNECTED
MACHINERY.....................................................66
3.12 WIRING CHECKLIST.........................................67
35
3.1 Section Safety
3.1
Section Safety
DANGER

WARNING
Do not operate equipment with covers removed.
The diagrams in this section may show drives without covers or safety shields to show
details. Be sure to reinstall covers or shields before operating the drives and run the drives
according to the instructions described in this manual.
Always ground the motor-side grounding terminal.
Improper equipment grounding could result in death or serious injury by contacting the
motor case.
Do not perform work on the drive while wearing loose clothing, jewelry or without eye
protection.
Remove all metal objects such as watches and rings, secure loose clothing, and wear eye
protection before beginning work on the drive.
Do not allow unqualified personnel to perform work on the drive.
Installation, maintenance, inspection, and servicing must be performed only by authorized
personnel familiar with installation, adjustment, and maintenance of AC drives.
36
3.1 Section Safety
WARNING
Do not touch any terminals before the capacitors have fully discharged.
Before wiring terminals, disconnect all power to the equipment. The internal capacitor
remains charged even after the power supply is turned off. The charge indicator LED will
extinguish when the DC bus voltage is below 50 Vdc. To prevent electric shock, wait at
least one minute after all indicators are off and measure the DC bus voltage level to confirm
safe level.
Tighten all terminal screws to the specified tightening torque.
Loose electrical connections could result in death or serious injury by fire due to overheating
of electrical connections.
Do not use improper combustible materials.
Attach the drive to metal or other noncombustible material.
37
Fire Hazard
3.1 Section Safety
NOTICE
circuit boards.
voltage.
Do not use unshielded cable for control wiring.
Failure to comply may cause electrical interference resulting in poor system performance.
Use shielded, twisted-pair wires and ground the shield to the ground terminal of the drive.
Check all the wiring to ensure that all connections are correct after installing the drive
and connecting any other devices.
Do not modify the drive circuitry.
Failure to comply could result in damage to the drive and will void warranty.
Route motor leads U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3 separate from other leads to reduce possible
interference-related issues.
Failure to comply may result in abnormal operation of drive and nearby equipment.
38
3.2 Standard Connection Diagram
3.2
Standard Connection Diagram
Connect the drive and peripheral devices as shown in Figure 3.. It is possible to run the drive
via the digital operator without connecting digital I/O wiring. This section does not discuss
drive operation; Refer to Start-Up Programming & Operation on page 69 for instructions
on operating the drive.
NOTICE: Inadequate branch short circuit protection could result in damage to the drive. Install adequate
branch circuit short circuit protection per applicable codes. The drive is suitable for circuits capable of
delivering not more than 31,000 RMS symmetrical amperes, 240 Vac maximum (200 V Class) and 480 Vac
maximum (400 V Class).
NOTICE: When the wiring distance is greater than 100 meters, pay special attention to the motor insulation
voltage or use a drive duty motor. Failure to comply could lead to motor insulation breakdown.
NOTICE: Do not connect AC control circuit ground to drive enclosure. Improper drive grounding can cause
control circuit malfunction.
NOTICE: Route motor leads U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3 separate from all other leads to reduce possible
interference related issues. Failure to comply may result in abnormal operation of drive and nearby equipment.
NOTICE: The minimum load for the multi-function relay output MA-MB-MC is 10 mA.
NOTICE: Correctly set Sink/Source jumper S3 for internal power supply. Failure to comply may result in
damage to the drive. Refer to I/O Connections on page 59 for details.
39

_
Terminals +1, +2, , B1, and B2
are for connecting options.
Never connect power supply
lines to these terminals.
2 MCCB
For single phase 200 V
r1
power supply, use
s1
R/L1 and S/L2.
t1
MC
1 MCCB
Three phase R/L1
<1>
<3>
power supply S/L2

for 200 V /400 V
T/L3
+2
SA
MC
THRX
Thermal relay for
motor cooling fan
SA
TRX
MC
SA
TRX
MC MA
Forward run/stop
B1
B2
J1000
Motor
r1
FU
s1
FV
U/T1
V/T2
Control circuit
Cooling fan
FW
t1
Main circuit
T/L3
MC
+1
R/L1
S/L2
THRX OFF ON
Thermal relay
Braking resistor
(option)
(option)
Jumper
<4>
2 MCCB
<2>
DC link choke
(option)
W/T3
S1
Ground
10 or less (400 V class)
100 or less (200 V class)
Reverse run/stop
S2
External fault
S3
Option unit
connector
Fault reset
Multi-step
speed 1
main/aux switch
S4
DIP switch S1
I
S5
Digital output
250 Vac, 10 mA to 1 A
30 Vdc, 10 mA to 1 A
(default setting)
<6>
+24 V 8 mA
MA Fault
Fault relay
MB
Digital inputs
(default setting)
<5>
SC
DIP
switch S3
24 V
Sink
MC
Source
Shield ground
terminal
2k
Main speed
frequency
reference.
Multi-function
programmable
+V
Setting power supply

+10.5 max. 20 mA
AM
Analog monitor
+ output
AM
A1 0 to +10 V (20 k )
(0)4 to 20 mA (250 )
AC
AC
0 to +10 Vdc
(2 mA)
<7>
Monitor
output
shielded line
main circuit terminal
twisted-pair shielded line

control terminal
Figure 3.1 Drive Standard Connection Diagram (200 V Class Example)
<1>
<2>
<3>
<4>
<5>
<6>
40
Remove the jumper when installing an optional DC link choke.

The MC on the input side of the main circuit should open when the thermal relay is
triggered.
Self-cooled motors do not require separate cooling fan motor wiring.
Connected using sequence input signal (S1 to S5) from NPN transistor; Default: sink
mode (0 V com).
Use only a +24 V internal power supply in sinking mode; the source mode requires
an external power supply. Refer to I/O Connections on page 59.
Minimum load: 5 Vdc, 10 mA (reference value).

<7>
Monitor outputs work with devices such as analog frequency meters, ammeters,
voltmeters and wattmeters; they are not intended for use as a feedback-type of signal.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Do not close the wiring for the control circuit unless the multifunction
input terminal parameter is properly set (S5 for 3-Wire; H1-05 = 0). Improper sequencing of run/stop circuitry
could result in death or serious injury from moving equipment.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Ensure start/stop and safety circuits are wired properly and in the
correct state before energizing the drive. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury from moving
equipment. When programmed for 3-Wire control, a momentary closure on terminal S1 may cause the drive
to start.
WARNING! When 3-Wire sequence is used, set the drive to 3-Wire sequence before wiring the control
terminals and ensure parameter b1-17 is set to 0 (drive does not accept a run command at power up (default).
If the drive is wired for 3-Wire sequence but set up for 2-Wire sequence (default) and if parameter b1-17 is
set to 1 (drive accepts a Run command at power up), the motor will rotate in reverse direction at power up of
the drive and may cause injury.
Figure 3.2 illustrates an example of a 3-Wire sequence.

Drive
S1
S2
S5
SC
Stop relay (N.C.) Run relay (N.O.)
Run command (run on momentary close)

Stop command (stop on momentary open)
Foward/reverse command
(multi-function input: H1-05 = 0)
Sequence input common
Figure 3.2 3-Wire Sequence
41
3.3 Main Circuit Connection Diagram
3.3
Main Circuit Connection Diagram
Refer to diagrams in this section for the Main Circuit wiring connections. Connections may
vary based on drive capacity. The main circuit DC power supply powers the control circuit.
NOTICE: Do not use the negative DC bus terminal - as a ground terminal. This terminal is at high voltage
DC potential. Improper wiring connections could result in damage to the drive.
u Single-Phase 200 V Class Models BA0001 to BA0010

DC link choke
(option)
Braking Resistor
Unit (option)
Jumper
+2
Single-phase
200 Vac
B1 B2
+1
Drive
R/L1
S/L2
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
Motor
Figure 3.3 Connecting Single-Phase Main Circuit Terminals

NOTICE: Do not connect T/L3 terminal when using single-phase power supply input. Incorrect wiring may
damage the drive.
u Three-Phase 200 V Class Models 2A0001 to 2A0020

Three-Phase 400 V Class Models 4A0001 to 4A0011
Braking
Resistor Unit
(option)
DC link choke
(option)
Jumper
+2 +1
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
Three phase 200 Vac
(400 Vac)
B1 B2
Drive
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
Motor
Figure 3.4 Connecting Three-Phase Main Circuit Terminals
42
3.4 Terminal Block Configuration
3.4
Terminal Block Configuration
The figures in this section provide illustrations of the main circuit terminal block
configurations of the different drive sizes.
Models:
CIMR-JBA0006, 0010
CIMR-J2A0010, 0012, 0020
CIMR-J4A0001, 0002, 0004, 0005, 0007,
0009, 0011
Models:
CIMR-JBA0001, 0002, 0003
CIMR-J2A0001, 0002, 0004, 0006
3
Figure 3.5 Main Circuit Terminal Block Configurations
43
3.5 Protective Covers
3.5
Protective Covers
Follow the procedure below to remove the protective covers before wiring the drive and to
reattach the covers after wiring is complete.
u IP20/Open-Chassis Cover Removal and Installation

n Removing the Protective Covers
1.
Loosen the screw that locks the front cover in place to remove.
Figure 3.6 Remove the Front Cover on an IP20/Open-Chassis Drive
2.
Apply pressure to the tabs on each side of the terminal cover. Pull the terminal cover
away from the drive while pushing in on the tabs to pull the cover free.
Figure 3.7 Remove the Terminal Cover on an IP20/Open-Chassis Drive
44
3.5 Protective Covers
n Reattaching the Protective Covers

Properly connect all wiring and route power wiring away from control signal wiring. Reattach
all protective covers when wiring is complete. Apply only a small amount of pressure to lock
the cover back into place.
Figure 3.8 Reattach the Protective Covers on an IP20/Open-Chassis Drive
45
3.6 Main Circuit Wiring
3.6
Main Circuit Wiring
This section describes the functions, specifications, and procedures required to safely and
properly wire the main circuit of the drive.
NOTICE: Do not solder the ends of wire connections to the drive. Soldered wiring connections can loosen
over time. Improper wiring practices could result in drive malfunction due to loose terminal connections.
u Main Circuit Terminal Functions

Table 3.1 Main Circuit Terminal Functions
Terminal
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
Type
Function
Reference
Connects line power to the drive.

Main circuit power Drives with single-phase 200 V input power use terminals R/
supply input
L1 and S/L2 only.
Do NOT use T/L3.
Drive output
Connects to the motor.
49
Braking resistor
Available for connecting a braking resistor or the braking

resistor unit option.
DC link choke
connection
These terminals are shorted at shipment. Remove the shorting

bar between 1 and 2 when connecting a DC link choke to
this terminal.
DC power supply
input
For connecting a DC power supply.
Ground
Grounding Terminal
49
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
B1
B2
1
2
1
(2 terminals)
u Wire Gauges and Tightening Torques

Select the appropriate wires and crimp terminals from Table 3.2 through Table 3.4.
Note:
1. Wire gauge recommendations based on drive continuous current ratings using 75 C 600 Vac vinylsheathed wire assuming ambient temperature within 30 C and wiring distance shorter than 100 m.
2. Terminals 1, 2, , B1 and B2 are for connecting optional devices such as a braking resistor. Do
not connect other non-specified devices to these terminals.
Consider the amount of voltage drop when selecting wire gauges. Increase the wire gauge
when the voltage drop is greater than 2% of motor rated voltage. Ensure the wire gauge is
suitable for the terminal block. Use the following formula to calculate the amount of voltage
drop:
Line drop voltage (V) = 3 x wire resistance (/km) x wire length (m) x current (A) x 10-3
Refer to instruction manual TOBP C720600 00 for braking unit or braking resistor unit
wire gauges.
46

Refer to UL Standards Compliance on page 254 for information on UL compliance.
n Single-Phase 200 V Class
BA0001
BA0002
BA0003
BA0006
Terminal
Wire Range
AWG, kcmil
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
14
18 to 14
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
14
18 to 14
, 1, 2
18 to 14
B1, B2
18 to 14
14
18 to 14
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
12
14 to 10
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
14
14 to 10
, 1, 2
14 to 10
B1, B2
BA0010
Recomm. Gauge
AWG, kcmil
14 to 10
10
14 to 10
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
10
14 to 10
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
14
14 to 10
, 1, 2
14 to 10
B1, B2
14 to 10
10
14 to 10
Screw Size
Tightening
Torque
Nm (lb.in.)
M3.5
0.8 to 1.0
(7.1 to 8.9)
M4
1.2 to 1.5
(10.6 to 13.3)
M4
1.2 to 1.5
(10.6 to 13.3)
Table 3.2 Wire Gauge and Torque Specifications

Drive
Model
n Three-Phase 200 V Class

Drive
Model
2A0001
2A0002
2A0004
2A0006
Recomm. Gauge
AWG, kcmil
Wire Range
AWG, kcmil
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
14
18 to 14
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
14
18 to 14
, 1, 2
18 to 14
18 to 14
14
18 to 14
Terminal
B1, B2
Screw Size
Tightening
Torque
Nm (lb.in.)
M3.5
0.8 to 1.0
(7.1 to 8.9)
47
Drive
Model
2A0010
Recomm. Gauge
AWG, kcmil
Wire Range
AWG, kcmil
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
14
14 to 10
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
14
14 to 10
, 1, 2
14 to 10
14 to 10
Terminal
B1, B2
2A0012
10
14 to 10
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
12
14 to 10
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
14
14 to 10
, 1, 2
14 to 10
14 to 10
B1, B2
2A0020
10
14 to 10
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
10
14 to 10
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
10
14 to 10
, 1, 2
14 to 10
14 to 10
10
14 to 10
B1, B2
Screw Size
Tightening
Torque
Nm (lb.in.)
M4
1.2 to 1.5
(10.6 to 13.3)
M4
1.2 to 1.5
(10.6 to 13.3)
M4
1.2 to 1.5
(10.6 to 13.3)
Screw Size
Tightening
Torque
Nm (lb.in.)
M4
1.2 to 1.5
(10.6 to 13.3)
M4
1.2 to 1.5
(10.6 to 13.3)
n Three-Phase 400 V Class

Drive
Model
4A0001
4A0002
4A0004
4A0005
4A0007
4A0009
48
Recomm. Gauge
AWG, kcmil
Wire Range
AWG, kcmil
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
14
14 to 10
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
14
14 to 10
, 1, 2
14 to 10
B1, B2
14 to 10
14
14 to 10
Terminal
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
14
14 to 10
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
14
14 to 10
, 1, 2
14 to 10
B1, B2
14 to 10
10
14 to 10
Drive
Model
4A0011
Recomm. Gauge
AWG, kcmil
Wire Range
AWG, kcmil
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
12
14 to 10
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
14
14 to 10
, 1, 2
14 to 10
Terminal
B1, B2
14 to 10
10
14 to 10
Screw Size
Tightening
Torque
Nm (lb.in.)
M4
1.2 to 1.5
(10.6 to 13.3)
u Main Circuit Terminal Power Supply and Motor Wiring

NOTICE: When connecting the motor to the drive output terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3, the phase order
for the drive and motor should match. Failure to comply with proper wiring practices may cause the motor to
run in reverse if the phase order is backward.
NOTICE: Route motor leads U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3 separate from all other leads to reduce possible
interference related issues. Failure to comply may result in abnormal operation of drive and nearby equipment.
NOTICE: Do not connect phase-advancing capacitors or LC/RC noise filters to the output circuits. Improper
application of noise filters could result in damage to the drive.
NOTICE: Do not connect the AC power line to the output motor terminals of the drive. Failure to comply could
result in death or serious injury by fire as a result of drive damage from line voltage application to output
terminals.
n Cable Length Between Drive and Motor

When the cable length between the drive and the motor is too long (especially at low frequency
output), note that the cable voltage drop may cause reduced motor torque. Drive output current
will increase as the leakage current from the cable increases. An increase in leakage current
may trigger an overcurrent situation and weaken the accuracy of the current detection.
Adjust the drive carrier frequency according to the following table. If the motor wiring distance
exceeds 100 m because of the system configuration, reduce the ground currents.
Refer to Table 3.5 to set the carrier frequency to an appropriate level.
Table 3.5 Cable Length Between Drive and Motor
Cable Length
50 m or less
100 m or less
Greater than 100 m
Carrier Frequency
15 kHz or less
5 kHz or less
2 kHz or less
Note:
When setting carrier frequency, calculate the cable length as the total distance of wiring to all connected
motors when running multiple motors from a single drive.
n Ground Wiring
Follow the precautions to wire the ground for one drive or a series of drives.
This section outlines the various steps, precautions, and checkpoints for wiring the main circuit
terminals and motor terminals.
49
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Always use a ground wire that complies with technical standards on
electrical equipment and minimize the length of the ground wire. Improper equipment grounding may cause
dangerous electrical potentials on equipment chassis, which could result in death or serious injury.
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Be sure to ground the drive ground terminal. (200 V Class: Ground to
100 or less, 400 V Class: Ground to 10 or less). Improper equipment grounding could result in death or
serious injury by contacting ungrounded electrical equipment.
NOTICE: Do not share the ground wire with other devices such as welding machines or large-current electrical
equipment. Improper equipment grounding could result in drive or equipment malfunction due to electrical
interference.
NOTICE: When using more than one drive, ground multiple drives according to instructions. Improper
equipment grounding could result in abnormal operation of drive or equipment.
Refer to Figure 3.9 when using multiple drives. Do not loop the ground wire.
A Correct
B Incorrect
Figure 3.9 Multiple Drive Wiring
50
n Wiring the Main Circuit Terminal

WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Shut off the power supply to the drive before wiring the main circuit
terminals. Failure to comply may result in death or serious injury.
Note:
A cover placed over the DC Bus and braking circuit terminals prior to shipment helps prevent miswiring.
Cut away covers as needed for terminals with a needle-nose pliers.
A
A Protective Cover to Prevent Miswiring
Main Circuit Connection Diagram
WARNING! Fire Hazard. The braking resistor connection terminals are B1 and B2. Do not connect braking
resistors to any other terminals. Improper wiring connections could cause the braking resistor to overheat
and cause death or serious injury by fire. Failure to comply may result in damage to the braking circuit or
drive.
Refer to section 3.3 Main Circuit Connection Diagram on page 42 for drive main power
circuit connections.
51
3.7 Control Circuit Wiring
3.7
Control Circuit Wiring
NOTICE: Do not solder the ends of wire connections to the drive. Soldered wire connections can loosen over
time. Improper wiring practices could result in drive malfunction due to loose terminal connections.
J1000
<1>
Forward run/stop
Control circuit
S1
Reverse run/stop
S2
External fault
S3
Option unit
connector
Fault reset
Multi-step
speed 1
main/aux switch
S4
DIP switch S1
I
S5
Digital output
250 Vac, 10 mA to 1 A
30 Vdc, 10 mA to 1 A
(default setting)
<3>
+24 V 8 mA
MA
Digital inputs
(default setting)
MB
MC
<2>
SC
DIP
switch S3
Sink
24 V
Source
Shield ground
terminal
2k
Main speed
frequency
reference.
Multi-function
programmable
+V
Setting power supply

+10.5 max. 20 mA
A1 0 to +10 V (20 k )
(0)4 to 20 mA (250 )
AM
Analog monitor
+ output
AM
AC
AC
shielded line
main circuit terminal
twisted-pair shielded line
0 to +10 Vdc
- (2 mA)
Monitor
output
control terminal
Figure 3.10 Control Circuit Connection Diagram
<1> Connected using sequence input signal (S1 to S5) from NPN transistor; Default: sink
mode (0 V com)
<2> Use only the +24 V internal power supply in sinking mode; the source mode requires an
external power supply. Refer to I/O Connections on page 59.
52

<3> Minimum load: 5 Vdc, 10 mA (reference value).
u Control Circuit Terminal Block Functions

Drive parameters determine which functions apply to the multi-function digital inputs (S1 to
S5), multi-function digital outputs (MA, MB, MC), and multi-function analog output (AM).
The default is called out next to each terminal in Figure 3.10.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Always check the operation and wiring of control circuits after being
wired. Operating a drive with untested control circuits could result in death or serious injury.
WARNING! Confirm the drive I/O signals and external sequence before starting test run. Failure to comply
may result in death or serious injury.
n Input Terminals
MultiFunction
Digital
Inputs
Main
Frequency
Reference
Input
No.
Terminal Name (Function)
S1
Multi-function input 1 (Closed: Forward

run, Open: Stop)
S2
Multi-function input 2 (Closed: Reverse

run, Open: Stop)
S3
Multi-function input 3 (External fault

(N.O.)
S4
Multi-function input 4 (Fault reset)
S5
Multi-function input 5 (Multi-step speed

reference 1)
Function (Signal Level) Default Setting
24 Vdc, 8 mA
Note: Drive preset to sinking mode. When using
source mode, set DIP switch S3 to allow for a 24 Vdc
(10%) external power supply. Refer to Sinking/
Sourcing Mode Switch on page 59.
input common (Control

SC Multi-function
common)
Sequence common
A1 Frequency reference
Input voltage or input current (Selected by DIP switch

S1 and H3-01) 0 to +10 Vdc (20 k),
Resolution: 1/1000
4 to 20 mA (250 ) or 0 to 20 mA (250 ),
Resolution: 1/500
+V Analog input power supply
+10.5 Vdc (max allowable current 20 mA)
AC Frequency reference common
0 Vdc
Table 3.6 Control Circuit Input Terminals

Type
53
n Output Terminals
Table 3.7 Control Circuit Output Terminals
Type
No.
Terminal Name (Function)
Function (Signal Level) Default Setting
MA N.O. output (fault)

Multi-Function
Digital Output
Digital output
30 Vdc, 10 mA to 1 A; 250 Vac, 10 mA to 1 A
Minimum load: 5 Vdc, 10 mA (reference value)
MB N.C. output (fault)

MC Digital output common
Monitor Output
AM Analog monitor output
0 to 10 Vdc (2 mA or less) Resolution: 1/256
AC Monitor common
0V
u Terminal Configuration
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
SC
A1 +V
AC AM AC
MA
MB
MC
Figure 3.11 Control Circuit Terminal
54
n Wire Size and Torque Specifications

Select appropriate wire type and size from Table 3.8. For simpler and more reliable wiring,
crimp ferrules to the wire ends. Refer to Table 3.9 for ferrule terminal types and sizes.
Table 3.8 Wire Size and Torque Specifications (Same for All Models)
Bare Wire Terminal
MA, MB,
MC
S1-S5,
SC, +V,
A1, AC,
AM
M3
M2
Tightenin
g Torque
Nm
0.5 to 0.6
0.22 to 0.25
Tightenin
g Torque
(in-lbs)
Applic.
wire size
mm2
(AWG)
Ferrule-Type Terminal
Recomm.
mm2
(AWG)
Applic.
wire size
mm2
(AWG)
Recomm.
mm2
(AWG)
4.4 to 5.3
Stranded:
0.25 to 1.5
(24 to 16)
Single: 0.25
to 1.5
(24 to 16)
0.75 (18)
0.25 to 1.0
(24 to 17)
0.5 (20)
1.9 to 2.2
Stranded:
0.25 to 1.0
(24 to 18)
Single: 0.25
to 1.5
(24 to 16)
0.75 (18)
Wire
Type
Shielded
line, etc.
0.25 to 0.5
(24 to 20)
0.5 (20)
n Ferrule-Type Wire Terminations

Crimp a ferrule to signal wiring to improve wiring simplicity and reliability. Use CRIMPFOX
6, a crimping tool manufactured by PHOENIX CONTACT.
d1
Terminal Screw
Size
6 mm
d2
Figure 3.12 Ferrule Dimensions
55

Table 3.9 Ferrule Terminal Types and Sizes
Size mm2 (AWG)
Type
L (mm)
d1 (mm)
d2 (mm)
0.25 (24)
AI 0.25-6YE
10.5
0.8
2.0
0.34 (22)
AI 0.34-6TQ
10.5
0.8
2.0
0.5 (20)
AI 0.5-6WH
12
1.1
2.5
0.75 (18)
AI 0.75-6GY
12
1.3
2.8
1.0
AI 1-6RD
12
1.5
3.0
Manufacturer
PHOENIX CONTACT
u Wiring Procedure
This section describes the proper procedures and preparations for wiring the control terminals.
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Do not remove covers or touch the circuit boards while the power is on.
NOTICE: Separate control circuit wiring from main circuit wiring (terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, B1, B2, U/T1,
V/T2, W/T3, -, +1, +2) and other high-power lines. Improper wiring practices could result in drive malfunction
due to electrical interference.
NOTICE: Separate wiring for digital output terminals MA, MB and MC from wiring to other control circuit lines.
Improper wiring practices could result in drive or equipment malfunction or nuisance trips.
NOTICE: Use a class 2 power supply (UL standard) when connecting to the control terminals. Improper
application of peripheral devices could result in drive performance degradation due to improper power supply.
NOTICE: Insulate shields with tape or shrink tubing to prevent contact with other signal lines and equipment.
Improper wiring practices could result in drive or equipment malfunction due to short circuit.
NOTICE: Connect the shield of shielded cable to the appropriate ground terminal. Improper equipment
grounding could result in drive or equipment malfunction or nuisance trips.
Wire the control terminals using Figure 3.13 as a guide. Prepare the ends of the control circuit
wiring as shown in Figure 3.14. Refer to Wire Size and Torque Specifications on page 55.
NOTICE: Do not tighten screws beyond the specified tightening torque. Failure to comply may damage the
terminal.
NOTICE: Use shielded twisted-pair cables as indicated to prevent operating faults. Improper wiring practices
could result in drive or equipment malfunction due to electrical interference.
Connect control wires as shown in the following figure:
56
D
Preparing wire
terminal ends
B
A
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
SC
A1
+V
AC AM AC
C
D Loosen screw to insert
wire.
E Blade depth of 0.4 mm or
less
Blade width of 2.5 mm or
less
A Control terminal block

B Avoid fraying wire
strands when stripping
insulation from wire.
Strip length 5.5 mm.
C Single wire or stranded
wire
Figure 3.13 Terminal Board Wiring Guide
B
A Drive side
B Connect shield to ground
terminal of drive.
C Insulation
E
D Control device side
E Shield sheath (Insulate
with tape)
F Shield
Figure 3.14 Preparing the Ends of Shielded Cables
When setting the frequency by analog reference from an external potentiometer, use shielded
twisted-pair wires and ground the shield of twisted-pair wires to the ground terminal of the
drive.
NOTICE: The analog signal lines between the drive and the operator station or peripheral equipment should
not exceed 50 meters when using an analog signal from a remote source to supply the frequency reference.
Failure to comply could result in poor system performance.
57

A
B
+V
A1
AC
A Drive
B Ground terminal (shield
connection)
C (+V) Frequency setting

power source +10.5 Vdc
maximum 20 mA
D (A1) Main speed
frequency reference 0 to
+10 Vdc (20 k)
or
4 to 20 mA (250 )/
0 to 20 mA (250 )
Figure 3.15 Wiring the Frequency Reference to the Control Circuit Terminals (External
Reference)
58
3.8 I/O Connections
3.8
I/O Connections
u Sinking/Sourcing Mode Switch

Set the DIP switch S3 on the front of the drive to switch the digital input terminal logic between
sinking mode and sourcing mode; the drive is preset to sinking mode.
Details
SINK
Sinking Mode (0 V common): default setting
SOURCE
Sourcing Mode (+24 V common)
Table 3.10 Sinking/Sourcing Mode Setting

Set Value
DIP Switch S3
SOURCE
SINK
Figure 3.16 DIP Switch S3
59
3.8 I/O Connections
n Transistor Input Signal Using 0 V Common/Sink Mode

When controlling the digital inputs by NPN transistors (0 V common/sinking mode), set the
DIP switch S3 to SINK and use the internal 24 V power supply.
Shielded Cable
SINK
Multi-funciton input
SOURCE
S1
FWD Run/Stop
REV Run/Stop
External Fault N.O.
Fault Reset
S2
S3
S4
S5
Multi-step Speed 1
SINK
+24 V
S3
SC
SOURCE
Figure 3.17 Sinking Mode: Sequence from NPN Transistor (0 V Common)
60
3.8 I/O Connections
n Transistor Input Signal Using +24 V Common/Source Mode

When controlling digital inputs by PNP transistors (+24 V common/sourcing mode), set the
DIP switch S3 to SOURCE and use an external 24 V power supply.
Shielded cable
SOURCE
SINK
External
power supply
+24V
FWD Run/Stop
S1
REV Run/Stop
S2
External Fault N.O.
S3
Fault reset
Multi-step speed 1
S4
S5
SINK
+24V
SC
S3
SOURCE
Figure 3.18 Source Mode: Sequence from PNP Transistor (+24 V Common)
61
3.9 Main Frequency Reference
3.9
Main Frequency Reference
u DIP Switch S1 Analog Input Signal Selection

The main frequency reference can either be a voltage or current signal input at terminal A1.
When using input A1 as a voltage input, set DIP switch S1 to V (right position, default
setting) and program parameter H3-01 to 0 (0 to +10 Vdc with lower limit) or 1 (0 to +10
Vdc without lower limit).
To use current input at terminal A1, set the DIP switch S1 to "I" and set parameter H3-01 =
2 or 3 (4-20 mA or 0-20 mA).
Table 3.11 Frequency Reference Configurations
Voltage Input
Current Input
Drive
Drive
+10.5 V
+V 20 mA current
0 to 10 V
A1 Main speed frequency
+10.5 V
+V 20 mA current
4 to 20 mA input
or
0 to 20 mA input
Main speed
A1 frequency reference
reference (voltage input)
(current input)
AC Frequency reference
AC Frequency
common
reference
common
DIP Switch S1
I
Figure 3.19 DIP Switch S1
62
3.9 Main Frequency Reference

Table 3.12 DIP Switch S1 Settings
Setting Value
Description
V ( right position)
Voltage input (0 to 10 V): default setting
I ( left position)
Current input (4 to 20 mA or 0 to 20 mA)

Table 3.13 Parameter H3-01 Details
No.
Parameter Name
Setting
Range
Default
Setting
MEMOBUS
Register
Selects the signal level for terminal A1.

0: 0 to +10 V, unipolar input (negative
frequency reference values are zeroed)
1: 0 to +10 V, bipolar input (negative
frequency reference changes the direction)
2: 4 to 20 mA
3: 0 to 20 mA
0 to 3
410
Frequency ref.
H3-01 (voltage/current)
terminal A1 signal
level selection
Description
63
3.10 Braking Resistor

Dynamic braking (DB) helps bring the motor to a smooth and rapid stop when working with
high inertia loads. Regeneration occurs as the drive lowers the motor frequency with high
inertia. When the regeneration flows back into the DC bus capacitors, an overvoltage situation
occurs. A braking resistor prevents these overvoltage faults.
NOTICE: Do not allow unqualified personnel to use the product. Failure to comply could result in damage to
the drive or braking circuit. Carefully review the braking resistor instruction manual when connecting a braking
option to the drive.
Note:
The braking circuit must be sized properly in order to dissipate the power required to decelerate the load
in the desired time. Ensure that the braking circuit can dissipate the energy for the set deceleration time
prior to running the drive.
NOTICE: Use a thermal overload relay or over-temperature contact to interrupt input power to the drive if the
braking resistor overheats. In the event of a possible thermal overload, the relay triggers the input contactor
and prevents the braking resistor from burning up.
u Installation
WARNING! Fire Hazard. The braking resistor connection terminals are B1 and B2. Do not connect a braking
resistor directly to any other terminals. Improper wiring connections could result in death or serious injury by
fire. Failure to comply may result in damage to the braking circuit or drive.
NOTICE: Connect braking resistors to the drive as shown in the I/O wiring examples. Improperly wiring braking
circuits could result in damage to the drive or equipment.
n Installation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
64
Disconnect all electrical power to the drive and wait at least one minute before
servicing the drive and any connected components.
Remove drive front cover.
Use a voltmeter to verify that voltage is disconnected from incoming power terminals
and that the DC bus no longer holds a charge.

Thermal
relay
Power
supply
MCCB
MC
Braking resistor
R/L1 B1
B2
S/L2
U/T1
T/L3
V/T2
Motor
W/T3
THRX OFF ON
MC
Drive
SA
MC
THRX
SA
Thermal relay switch for

external braking resistor
TRX
MC
SA
TRX
Fault contact
Figure 3.20 Connecting a Braking Resistor
4.
5.
6.
7.
Follow manufacturer instructions to connect the resistor unit to the drive using proper
wire gauge according to local electrical codes.
Power leads for the remote mount resistors generate high levels of electrical noise;
group these signal leads separately.
Mount the resistor unit on a noncombustible surface. Maintain minimum side and top
clearances according to resistor manufacturer instructions.
WARNING! Fire Hazard. Do not use improper combustible materials. Failure to comply could
result in death or serious injury by fire. Attach the drive or braking resistors to metal or other
noncombustible material.
Reinstall drive covers and resistor covers, if provided.

Set parameter L3-04 = 0 to disable stall prevention during deceleration.
Set parameter L8-01 to 1 to enable overheat protection when using a heatsinkmounted braking resistor option.
Set L8-01 = 0 for other braking resistor types.
Table 3.14 Braking Resistor Settings
Parameter
8.
Settings
L8-01: Internal Dynamic Braking

Resistor Protection Selection
0: Disabled. The drive will not provide overheat protection.

Supply separate means of overheat protection.
1: Enabled. Braking Resistor is protected from overheat.
L3-04: Stall Prevention During

Decel
0: Stall prevention disabled.
Operate the system and verify the required deceleration rate is obtained during
dynamic braking or stopping.
65
MA MC
3.11 Interlocking with Connected Machinery
3.11 Interlocking with Connected Machinery

For safety reasons, applications that may be affected by the operation status of the drive should
be set up so that operation can only occur when the drive is ready to operate. A "Drive ready"
and "Fault" signal should be assigned to the multi-function outputs to guarantee interlock with
application.
u Drive Ready Signal

When the Drive ready signal has been set to one of the multi-function contact outputs, that
output will close whenever the drive is ready to accept a Run command or is already running.
Under the following conditions the Drive ready signal will switch off and remain off, even if
a Run command is entered:
when the power supply is shut off
during a fault
when there is problem with the control power supply
when a parameter setting error makes the drive unable to run even if a Run command has
been entered
when a fault such as overvoltage or undervoltage is triggered as soon as the Run command
is entered
when the drive is in the Programming mode and will not accept a Run command even when
entered.
66
3.12 Wiring Checklist

No.
Item
Page
Drive, peripherals, option cards

1
Check drive model number to ensure receipt of correct model.
19
Check for correct braking resistors, DC link chokes, noise filters, and other peripheral
devices.
64
Ensure area surrounding the drive complies with specifications.
The voltage from the power supply should fall within the input voltage specification range
of the drive.
The voltage rating for the motor should match the drive output specifications.
Installation area and physical setup

29
Power supply voltage, output voltage
19
Main circuit wiring

6
Confirm proper branch circuit protection exists per National and Local codes.
39
Properly wire the power supply to drive terminals R/L1, S/L2 and T/L3.
42
Properly wire the drive and motor together. The motor lines and drive output terminals
R/T1, V/T2 and W/T3 should match in order to produce the desired phase order. If the
phase order is incorrect, the drive will rotate in the opposite direction.
49
Use 600 Vac vinyl-sheathed wire for the power supply and motor lines.
46
10
Use the correct wire gauges for the main circuit. Refer to Table 3.2 through Table 3.4.
46
When using comparatively long motor cable, calculate the amount of voltage drop.
Motor rated voltage (V) x 0.02
46
3 x voltage resistance (/km) x cable length (m) x motor rated current (A) x 10-3
If the cable between the drive and motor exceeds 50 m, adjust the carrier frequency
(C6-02) accordingly.
49
11
Properly ground the drive. Review page 49.
49
12
Tightly fasten all terminal screws (control circuit terminals, grounding terminals). Refer
to Table 3.2 through Table 3.4..
46
67
No.
Item
Page
Set up overload protection circuits when running multiple motors from a single drive.
Power supply
Drive
MC1
OL1
M1
MC2
OL2
M2
13
MCn
OLn
Mn
MC1 - MCn ... magnetic contactor

OL 1 - OL n ... thermal relay
Note: Close MC1 through MCn before operating the drive.

14
If using a braking resistor or dynamic braking resistor unit, install a magnetic contactor.
Properly install the resistor, and ensure that overload protection shuts off the power supply.
15
Verify phase advancing capacitors are NOT installed on the output side of the drive.
64
-
Control circuit wiring
68
16
Use twisted-pair cables for all drive control circuit wiring.
52
17
Ground the shields of shielded wiring to the GND
56
18
If using a 3-Wire sequence, properly set parameters for multi-function contact input
terminals S1 through S5, and properly wire control circuits.
terminal.
41
19
Check for any other wiring mistakes. Only use a multimeter to check wiring.
20
Properly fasten the control circuit terminal screws in the drive. Refer to Table 3.2 through
Table 3.4.
21
Pick up all wire clippings.
22
Ensure that no frayed wires on the terminal block are touching other terminals or
connections.
23
Properly separate control circuit wiring and main circuit wiring.
24
Analog signal line wiring should not exceed 50 m.
46
4
Start-Up
Programming &
Operation
This chapter explains the functions of the LED operator and how
to program the drive for initial operation.
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
SECTION SAFETY.............................................70
USING THE DIGITAL LED OPERATOR..............73
THE DRIVE AND PROGRAMMING MODES.......79
START-UP FLOWCHART..................................87
BASIC OPERATION..........................................88
POWERING UP THE DRIVE.............................112
NO-LOAD OPERATION TEST RUN..................114
TEST RUN WITH LOAD CONNECTED.............116
VERIFYING AND BACKING UP PARAMETER
SETTINGS.......................................................117
4.10 TEST RUN CHECKLIST...................................119
69
4.1 Section Safety
4.1
Section Safety
DANGER

WARNING
The diagrams in this section may include drives without covers or safety shields to illustrate
motor case.
safe level.
70
4.1 Section Safety
WARNING
protection.
Start-Up Programming
& Operation
Fire Hazard
71
4.1 Section Safety
NOTICE
circuit boards.
voltage.
Use shielded twisted-pair wires and ground the shield to the ground terminal of the drive.
Do not allow unqualified personnel to use the product.
Failure to comply could result in damage to the drive or braking circuit.
Carefully review instruction manual TOBPC72060000 when connecting a braking option
to the drive.
72
4.2 Using the Digital LED Operator
4.2
Using the Digital LED Operator
Use the LED operator to enter run and stop commands, display data, edit parameters, as well
as display fault and alarm information.
u Keys, Displays, and LEDs
11
12
13
10
& Operation
2
15
4
3
P
STOP
14
7
8
9
6
4
STOP
J1000
1
2
3
4
5
:
:
:
:
:
WARNING
:
6
:
7
8
:
9
:
Risk of electric shock.
Read manual before installing.

Wait 5 minutes for capacitor discharge after
disconnecting power supply.
To conform to
requirements, make sure
to ground the supply neutral for 400V class.
400V
73

Table 4.1 Keys and Displays on the LED Operator
No.
Display
Name
Function
Data Display Area
Displays the frequency reference, parameter number, etc.
ESC Key
Returns to the previous menu.
RESET Key
Moves the cursor to the right.

Resets the drive to clear a fault situation.
RUN Key
Starts the drive.
Up Arrow Key
Scrolls up to select parameter numbers, setting values, etc.
Down Arrow Key
Scrolls down to select parameter numbers, setting values, etc.
STOP Key
Stops the drive.

Note: Stop priority circuit. Pressing the STOP key will always
cause the drive to stop the motor, even if a Run command is
active at any external Run command source. Set parameter o2-06
to 0 to disable the STOP key priority.
ENTER Key
Selects all modes, parameters, settings, etc.

Selects a menu item to move from one display screen to the next.
LO/RE Selection Key
Switches drive control between the operator (LOCAL) and the

control circuit terminals (REMOTE).
Note: LOCAL/REMOTE key effective during stop in drive
mode.
10
RUN Light
Lit while the drive is operating the motor.
11
LO/RE Light
Lit while the operator (LOCAL) is selected to run the drive.
12
ALM LED Light
13
REV LED Light
14
DRV LED Light
15
FOUT LED Light
STOP
Refer to LED Screen Displays on page 76.
74
u Digital Text Display

Text appears on the LED Operator as shown below. This section explains the meaning of text
as it appears on the display screen.
Lit
Flashing
Table 4.2 Digital Text Display
<1>
LED
Text
LED
Text
LED
Text
<1>
LED
& Operation
Text
<1>
None
None
Displayed in two digits.
75
u LED Screen Displays

Display
Lit
Flashing
Off
When the drive detects an alarm When an alarm occurs

or error
oPE detected
Normal state (no fault or alarm)
Motor is rotating in reverse
Motor is rotating forward
Drive Mode
Programming Mode
Displays output frequency (Hz)
As illustrated
in this
manual
u LO/RE LED and RUN LED Indications

STOP
LED
Lit
Flashing
Flashing Quickly
<1>
Off
When a Run command

is selected from the
LED operator
(LOCAL)
Run command is selected

from device other than LED
operator (REMOTE)
During Run
During deceleration to
stop
During deceleration
at a fast-stop.
When a Run
During stop
command is input and During stop by
frequency reference is
interlock operation.
0
As shown
<1>
76
Refer to Figure 4.1 for the difference between flashing and flashing quickly.

1s
ON
ON
Flashing
Flashing
quickly
ON
ON
ON
ON
Figure 4.1 RUN LED Status and Meaning
Drive output frequency
Frequency setting
RUN LED
during stop
0 Hz
RUN
RUN
STOP
STOP
6 Hz
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
& Operation
Flashing
Figure 4.2 RUN LED and Drive Operation
77
u Menu Structure for Digital LED Operator

Description of Key Operations
Turn the power on
DRIVE MODE
<1>
Forward Selection
Reverse Selection
:
:
Output Frequency
Output Current
Note: XX characters are shown in this manual.
The drive will display the actual setting values.
Output Voltage
XX
Monitor Display
PROGRAMMING MODE
XX
XX XX
XX
XX XX
XX
XX XX
XX
XX XX
XX
Verify Menu
Set Up Mode
XX
Parameter Setting Mode
XX
Figure 4.3 Digital LED Operator Screen Structure
<1> Reverse can only be selected when LOCAL is set.
78
4.3 The Drive and Programming Modes
4.3
The Drive and Programming Modes
The drive functions are divided into two main groups accessible via the Digital LED Operator:
Drive Mode: The Drive mode allows motor operation and parameter monitoring. Parameter
settings cannot be changed when accessing functions in the Drive Mode (Table 4.3).
Programming Mode: The Programming Mode allows access to setup/adjust, verify
parameters. The drive prohibits changes in motor operation such as start/stop when the Digital
LED Operator is accessing a function in the Programming Mode.
Table 4.3 illustrates the different functions visible as the Up arrow is scrolled immediately
after powering up the drive.
Note:
When b1-08 (Run Command Selection while in Programming Mode) is set to 1 (enabled), the drive can
run even if the mode is switched to the programming mode. When setting b1-08 to 0 (disabled), the mode
cannot be switched to the programming mode while the drive is running.
Mode Group
Description
Key Press LED Digital Operator Display

<1>
Frequency Reference Display

(Initial power-up state)
Forward/Reverse
STOP
Drive Mode Functions

(Motor operation and
monitoring)
Output Frequency Display

STOP
Output Current Display

STOP
Output Voltage Reference
STOP
Monitor Display
STOP
Verify Function
STOP
Programming Mode Functions Setup Group Parameters

(Changing parameters)
STOP
All Parameters
STOP
<1>
The enlarged illustration of the LED indicates that the LED is on.
STOP
& Operation
Table 4.3 Summary of Modes
79
u Navigating the Drive and Programming Modes

The drive is set to operate in Drive Mode when it is first powered up. Switch between display
and
.
screens using
Frequency Reference
Power Up
STOP
This display screen allows the user to monitor and set the frequency
reference while the drive is running. Refer to The Drive and
Programming Modes on page 79.
Note: The user can select items to display when the drive is first
powered up by setting parameter o1-02.
Default Setting
Forward/Reverse
: Motor rotates forward.

: Motor rotates in reverse.
Drive Mode
STOP
Note: For applications that should not run in reverse (fans, pumps,
etc.), set parameter b1-04 = 1 to prohibit the motor from rotating in
reverse. This sequence also puts the drive in LOCAL mode.
Switching to reverse:
The LED is lit when

LOCAL is selected
Output Frequency Display
Monitors the frequency output by the drive.
Drive Mode
STOP
Output Current Display
Monitors the output current of the drive.
STOP
80

Output Voltage Reference
Monitors the output voltage of the drive.
Drive Mode
STOP
Monitor Display
Monitor parameters (U parameters) are displayed.
STOP
Verify Function
Lists all parameters that have been edited or changed from default
Refer to Verifying Parameter Changes: Verify Menu
settings.
on page 84.
Setup
A select list of parameters necessary to get the drive operational

quickly.
Refer to The Setup Group within the Programming
Mode on page 82.
STOP
Parameter Setting
Allows the user to access and edit all parameter settings.

Parameter List on page 213.
Refer to
STOP
Drive Mode
Frequency Reference
Returns to the frequency reference display screen.
n Drive Mode Details

STOP
The following actions are possible in the Drive Mode:

Run and stop the drive.
Monitor the operation status of the drive (frequency reference, output frequency, output
current, output voltage, etc.).
View information on an alarm.
Note:
Select "Drive Mode" when running. The mode can be switched to any mode (program mode, etc.) other
than drive mode while the drive is stopped. However, the drive cannot be operated in other modes. Return
the mode to "Drive Mode" after completing periodic inspection.
Figure 4.4 illustrates changing the default frequency reference of F 0.00 (0 Hz) to F 6.00 (6
Hz) while in Drive Mode. This example assumes the drive is set to LOCAL.
& Operation
STOP
Programming
Mode
81
Frequency reference
display at power up
STOP
Press to select LOCAL
Press to select the

digit to the right
Press until the frequency

reference becomes 6 Hz
Figure 4.4 Setting the Frequency Reference while in Drive Mode

Note:
The drive will not accept a frequency reference set value unless the ENTER key is pressed after the
frequency reference is entered. This feature prevents accidental setting of the frequency reference. By
setting o2-05 (Frequency Reference Setting Method Selection) to 1 (Enabled), the drive will accept the
frequency reference while it is being adjusted on the digital operator.
n Programming Mode Details

The following actions are possible in the programming mode:
Verify Function: Verify parameter setting changes from original default values.
Setup Group: Access a list of commonly used parameters to simplify setup.
Parameter Setting Mode: Access and edit all parameter settings.
The Setup Group within the Programming Mode
In Setup Group, the user can access the minimum group of parameters required to operate the
application.
Note:
Setup Group parameters are listed in Table 4.4.
Figure 4.5 illustrates the keys to press to enter the Setup Group.
In this example, the source of the frequency reference is changed from the control circuit
terminals to the LED Operator (i.e., b1-01 is changed from 1 to 0).
82

Frequency reference
appears when powered up
STOP
Press until
appears
<1>
LED Operator
Control Circuit
Terminal Select digit
to edit
Parameter Display
STOP
<2>
Parameter Display
(2x)
STOP
& Operation
STOP
<1> Move to the right to change parameter settings. Scroll

down to view and check settings in the Setup Mode.
<2> To return to the Top Menu, press
. To view or edit
other parameters, press
and
.
STOP
4
Figure 4.5 Setup Group Example
u Changing Parameter Settings or Values

This example explains changing C1-01 (Acceleration Time 1) from 10.0 seconds (default) to
20.0 seconds.
Step
1.
2.
Display/Result
Turn on the power to the drive. The initial display appears.
Press the
key until the Setup Mode Screen appears.
83

Step
3.
Press the
Display/Result
key to view the parameter setting display.
4.
Scroll through parameters by pressing the

appears.
5.
Press
to view the current setting value (10.0). (Number
farthest to the left flashes)
6.
Press
7.
Press the
8.
Press
9.
key until C1-01
until the desired number is selected. (1 flashes)

key and enter 0020.0.
and the drive will confirm the change.
The display automatically returns to the screen shown in Step 4.
10.
Press the
key until back at the initial display.
u Verifying Parameter Changes: Verify Menu

The Verify Menu lists edited parameters from the Programming Mode. The Verify Menu
helps determine which settings have been changed, and is particularly useful when replacing
a drive. If no settings have been changed the Verify Menu will read
. The Verify menu
also allows users to access and re-edit edited parameters.
Note:
The Verify Menu will not display parameters from the A1 group even if those parameters have been
changed from default settings.
The following example is a continuation of the steps beginning on page 83. Here, parameter
C1-01 is accessed using the Verify Menu and is changed again to 20.0 s.
To check the list of edited parameters:
Step
1.
2.
84
Display/Result
Press
until the display shows the Verify representation.

Step
3.
Press
to enter the list of parameters that have been edited
from their original default settings.
Scroll through the list by pressing the
4.
5.
Display/Result
Press the
key.
key until C1-01 appears.
Press the
key to access the setting value. (number farthest
to the left flashes)
u Switching Between LOCAL and REMOTE
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. The drive may start unexpectedly if the Run command is already
applied when switching from LOCAL mode to REMOTE mode when b1-07 = 1, resulting in death or serious
injury. Be sure all personnel are clear of rotating machinery and electrical connections prior to switching
between LOCAL mode and REMOTE mode.
There are two ways to switch between LOCAL and REMOTE.

Note:
1. After selecting LOCAL, the LO/RE light will remain lit.

2. The drive will not allow the user to switch between LOCAL and REMOTE during run.
n Using the LO/RE Key on the LED Operator

Step
Display/Result
1. Turn on the power to the drive. The initial display appears.
Press
2. Local.
. The LO/RE light will light up. The drive is now in
To set the drive for REMOTE operation, press the
STOP
key again.
& Operation
Entering the run command using the LED operator is referred to as LOCAL, while entering
the run command from an external device via the control circuit terminals or network option
is referred to as REMOTE.
85
n Using Input Terminals S1 through S5 to Switch between LO/RE

Switch between LOCAL and REMOTE using one of the digital input terminals S1 through
S5 (set the corresponding parameter H1-01 through H1-05 to 1).
Follow the example below to set the digital input terminals.
1. For a list of digital input selections, Refer to Parameter List on page 213.
2. Setting a multi-function input terminal to a value of 1 disables the LO/RE key on the LED operator.
Note:
u Parameters Available in the Setup Group

n Setup Mode (STUP)
Parameters used for this drive are classified into A to U. To simplify the drive setup, frequently
used parameters are selected and input into Setup Mode.
1.
2.
To set a parameter, the Setup Mode must be displayed first. Press the Up/Down key
is displayed.
until
Select the parameter and change the setting. Table 4.4 lists parameters available in
the Setup group. If the desired parameter cannot be set in the Setup mode, use the
Parameter Setting mode.
Table 4.4 Setup Group Parameters
Parameter
86
Name
Parameter
Name
b1-01
Frequency Reference Selection
d1-17
Jog Frequency Reference
b1-02
Run Command Selection
E1-01
Input Voltage Reference
b1-03
Stop Method Selection
E1-04
Maximum Output Frequency
C1-01
Acceleration Time 1
E1-05
Maximum Voltage
C1-02
Deceleration Time 1
E1-06
Base Frequency
C6-01
Drive Duty Selection
E1-09
Minimum Output Frequency
C6-02
Carrier Frequency Selection
E2-01
Motor Rated Current
d1-01
Frequency Reference 1
H4-02
Terminal AM Gain Setting
d1-02
L1-01
Motor Protection Function Selection
d1-03
L3-04
d1-04
Stall Prevention Selection during

Deceleration
4.4 Start-up Flowchart
4.4
Start-up Flowchart
This section summarizes the basic steps required to start the drive. The flowchart is intended
as a quick reference to help familiarize the user with start-up procedures.
u Flowchart: Basic Start-up

Figure 4.6 describes basic start-up sequence for the drive and motor system. This sequence
varies slightly depending on application. Use drive default parameter settings in simple
applications that do not require high precision.
START
Install and wire the drive as explained in Chapters 1, 2 and 3
Apply main power on to the drive.
Adhere to safety messages concerning application of power.
& Operation
Set the basic parameters:

* b1-01/02 for frequency reference and run command source selection
* H1-, H2-01, H3-, H4-, H5- for I/O terminal setting
* d1- for multi-speed references if used
* C1- and C2- for accel./decel. and S-curve time settings
* C6-01 for heavy/normal duty mode selection
* L3-04 if braking options are used
* E1-, V/f Characteristics
* E2-, Motor 1 parameters
Run the motor without load; check the rotation direction and operation.
Verify external signal commands to the drive work as desired.
Couple the load or machine to the motor. Run the machine and check for desired operation.
Fine tune parameters. Adjust application settings if necessary.

Check the machine operation and verify parameter settings.
Drive is ready to run the application.
Figure 4.6 Basic Start-Up
87
4.5 Basic Operation
4.5
Basic Operation
This section explains the basic settings required for initial drive operation. Checking these
basic parameter settings during start-up will help to ensure a successful drive start-up.
If more information is required for parameters not listed in this section, Refer to Parameter
List on page 213 as required for a complete listing of drive parameters.
u Initialize Parameter Values: A1-03

Parameter A1-03 (Initialize Parameters) resets all parameters to the original default values.
Note:
Record all the changed settings before initializing parameters.
n Different Methods of Drive initialization

2220: 2-Wire Initialization
Returns all parameters to factory default values for 2-wire control. A 2-Wire sequence assigns
functions to input terminals S1 and S2.
Returns all parameters to factory default values for 3-wire control. A 3-Wire sequence assigns
functions to input terminals S1, S2, and S5.
u Frequency Reference Source: b1-01

This section explains how to assign the frequency reference. Parameters b1-01 and b1-02 can
be used to select the source of the run command and the frequency reference independently
(e.g., set the reference from the operator and set the run command from the terminals).
n Frequency Reference from the LED Operator: b1-01 = 0

When b1-01 = 0 the frequency reference will be provided by the LED operator. Refer to The
Drive and Programming Modes on page 79 for information on how to set the frequency
reference.
n Frequency Reference from the Analog Input Terminal: b1-01 = 1

When b1-01 = 1, analog input A1 provides the frequency reference.
Note:
Set H3-01 (Terminal A1 Function Selection) to 0 to configure Terminal A1 for the main analog
frequency reference.
Voltage Input
When entering the frequency reference with a voltage signal, set parameter H3-01 to 0 for
0 to 10 Vdc with lower reference limit. Set H3-01 to 1 if 0 to 10 Vdc input without lower
limit is required. Set DIP Switch S1 for voltage input (position V).
88
4.5 Basic Operation
DIP switch S1
I
Drive
0 to 10 V
A1
Main frequency
(voltage or current input)
AC
Analog common
Current Input
When entering the frequency reference using an analog input signal, set parameter H3-01 to
2 if 4 to 20 mA input is used. When using 0 to 20 mA input, set H3-01 to 3. Set DIP
Switch S1 for current input (position I).
DIP switch S1
I
Drive
V (+10.5 V, 20 mA power supply)
0 or 4 to 20 mA input
A1
AC
Main Frequency
(current input)
Analog common
Figure 4.8 Current Input for the Frequency Reference
& Operation
Figure 4.7 Voltage Input for the Frequency Reference
89
4.5 Basic Operation
u Run Command Input Selection: b1-02

This section explains how to assign the run command input.
Parameters b1-01 and b1-02 can be used to select the source of the run command and the
frequency reference independently, e.g. set the reference from the operator and set the run
command from the terminals.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Clear personnel, secure equipment, and check sequence and safety
circuitry before starting the drive. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury from moving
equipment.
n Run the Drive at 6 Hz using the LED Operator: b1-02 = 0

To assign the run command to the operator panel, set parameter b1-02 to 0. This will set up
the drive to acknowledge the run command through the LED operator. Initialize the run
command using the Run and Stop keys. Upon power up, the drive uses parameter b1-02 to
determine the run command location.
The following procedure indicates how to start and stop the drive through the LED operator
after parameter b1-02 has been set to 0.
Note:
When b1-02 (Run Command Selection) is not set to 0 (operator), press
Step
to set LOCAL.
Display/Result

Set the frequency reference to F6.00 (6 Hz).
2. Note: Refer to Drive Mode Details on page 81 for instructions on how
to set the frequency reference.
3.
Press the
key to start the motor.
STOP
4. The motor should accelerate up to 6 Hz while the RUN light is on.
off
on
STOP
5. Press the
key to stop the motor. The RUN light will flash
until the motor comes to a complete stop.
90
flashing
off
4.5 Basic Operation
n Run the Drive using Digital Input Terminals: b1-02 = 1

This setting uses the digital input terminals to enter the run command. The factory setting is
a 2-Wire sequence.
Using a 2-Wire Sequence
Digital Input Terminals
ON
OFF
S1
Forward Run
Stop
S2
Reverse Run
Stop
Drive
Forward Run
S1
Reverse Run
SC Digital Input Common
Figure 4.9 Example Wiring Diagram for 2-Wire Sequence
Using a 3-Wire Sequence

When H1-05 (Multi-Function Digital Input Terminal S5 Function Selection) = 0, the functions
of terminals S1 and S2 are set to 3-Wire sequence, and the multi-function input terminal
becomes forward/reverse run command terminal.
Stop Button
(N.C.)
Run Button
(N.O.)
Drive
S1
S2
S5
SC
Run Command
Runs when S1 and S2 are closed
(Run button pushed)
Stop Command
Stops when S1 and S2 are open
(Stop button pushed)
FWD/REV Command <1>
Digital Input Common
Figure 4.10 Example Wiring Diagram for 3-Wire Sequence Using Terminal S5
91
& Operation
S2
4.5 Basic Operation

<1> When terminal S5 is open, the motor rotates forward. When closed, the motor rotates in
reverse.
WARNING! When 3-Wire sequence is used, set the drive to 3-Wire sequence before wiring the control
terminals and ensure parameter b1-17 is set to 0 (drive does not accept a run command at power up (default)).
If the drive is wired for 3-Wire sequence but set up for 2-Wire sequence (default) and if parameter b1-17 is
set to 1 (drive accepts a Run command at power up), the motor will rotate in reverse direction at power up of
the drive and may cause injury.
Note:
Refer to Parameter List on page 213 for a list of digital input functions. After performing a 3-Wire
initialization (A1-03 = 3), the drive will automatically assign the forward/reverse command to terminal
S5.
Note:
Run by Turning on/off the Power Supply. For safety reasons, the drive is initially set up not to accept a
run command at power up (b1-17 = "0"). If a run command is issued at power up, the RUN indicator
LED will flash quickly. To change this and have the run command issued by the drive, change parameter
b1-17 to 1.
u Stopping Method Selection: b1-03

When a Stop command is issued, the drive stops the motor using one of two possible methods.
n Ramp to Stop: b1-03 = 0

When b1-03 = 0, the motor will decelerate to a stop when a stop command is entered. The
deceleration time is set by C1-02 (Deceleration Time 1). Refer to Acceleration/Deceleration:
C1-01 to C1-04 on page 93.
When the output frequency falls below E1-09 (Minimum Output Frequency) during
deceleration, the DC Injection braking current (b2-02) will be activated for the specified DC
Injection time at stop (b2-04).
Run Command
ON
OFF
Output Frequency
Decelerates according to the
specified deceleration time
Minimum Output Freq.

(E1-09)
Decel Time
(C1-02, etc.)
DC Injection Braking
DC Injection
Current (b2-02)
DC Braking Time at Stop (b2-04)
Figure 4.11 Ramp to Stop
92
4.5 Basic Operation
n Coast to Stop: b1-03 = 1

When the run command is removed, the drive will shut off its output and the motor will coast
(uncontrolled deceleration). The motor will coast to a stop at the rate determined by the load
inertia.
Run Command
ON
OFF
Output Voltage
Drive output voltage interrupted
Figure 4.12 Coast to Stop

Note:
1. After entering a stop command, the drive will not accept another run command until the time set
passes.
2. Do not enter another run command until the motor comes to a complete stop. If a run command must
be entered before the motor has fully stopped, use DC Injection to slow the motor or catch the motor
before restarting.
u Acceleration/Deceleration: C1-01 to C1-04

C1-01 (Acceleration Time 1) sets the time to accelerate from 0 to the maximum output
frequency (E1-04). C1-02 (Deceleration Time 1) sets the time to decelerate from maximum
output frequency to 0.
No.
Parameter Name
C1-01
<1>
C1-02
<1>
<1>
Description
Acceleration Time 1
Sets the time to accelerate from 0 to 100% (maximum

output frequency).
Deceleration Time 1
Sets the time to decelerate from 100% (maximum output

frequency) to 0%.
Setting
Range
Default
0.0 to
6000.0
10.0 s
The parameter can be changed during run.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Rapid deceleration may cause the drive to fault on an overvoltage
condition, resulting in death or serious injury due to an uncontrolled motor state. Set an acceptable
deceleration time in parameter C1-09 when using the Fast-stop feature.
93
& Operation
Motor Rotations
4.5 Basic Operation
n Switching Accel/Decel Times with Digital Input Terminals

Two acceleration / deceleration times can be selected using one of the digital input terminals
S1 through S5.
Program one of the parameters H1-01 through H1-05 to 07 (Accel/Decel Time). Opening
or closing the digital input changes the accel/decel times as shown below:
Accel/Decel Time
H1- = 7
Acceleration Time
Deceleration Time
Open (not selected)
C1-01
C1-02
Closed
C1-03
C1-04
n Using S-Curve Characteristics during Acceleration/Deceleration

Use S-curve characteristics to smooth acceleration and deceleration and to minimize abrupt
shock to the load.
Note:
Setting S-curve characteristics will lengthen accel/decel times as follows:

Accel Time = Selected Accel Time + (C2-01 + C2-02)/2
Decel Time = Selected Decel Time + (C2-03 + C2-04)/2
Setting Example
Figure 4.13 illustrates S-curve characteristics switching between forward and reverse.
Forward Run
Command
Reverse Run
Command
C2-02
Output
Frequency
C2-03
C2-04
C2-01
C2-04
C2-01
C2-02
C2-03
Figure 4.13 S-Curve Characteristics
94
4.5 Basic Operation
u Drive Duty and Carrier Frequency Selection: C6-01 and C6-02

n Drive Duty Selection: C6-01
The drive has two different duty modes from which to select based on the load characteristics.
The drive rated current, overload capacity, and carrier frequency will change depending upon
the duty mode selection. Use parameter C6-01 (Duty Cycle) to select Heavy Duty (HD) or
Normal Duty (ND) for the application. The default setting is ND. Refer to Specifications on
page 199 for details about the rated current.
HD and ND Mode Selections
Mode
HD Rating
ND Rating
C6-01
Overload
Overload
120 %
Rated Load
100 %
Rated Load
100 %
Characteristics
Application
Motor Speed
100 %
Use HD Rating is designed applications

requiring a high overload tolerance with
constant load torque, like conveyors.
Motor Speed
100 %
Use ND Rating for applications in which the

torque requirements drop along with the speed.
Examples include fans or pumps where a high
overload tolerance is not required.
Overload capability 100% continuous, 150% of drive rated current 100% continuous, 120% of drive rated current
(oL2)
for 60 s
for 60 s
C6-02
2.0 to 15.0 kHz (default depends on drive capacity)
L3-02 Stall
Prevention during
Acceleration
150%
120%
L3-06 Stall
Prevention during
Run
150%
120%
Note:
1. By selecting HD/ND, motor parameter E2 is changed to the value for the maximum applicable
motor.
2. Swing PWM uses 2.0 kHz carrier frequency as a base. The application of special PWM patterns
keeps the audible noise of the motor low.
95
& Operation
150 %
4.5 Basic Operation
n Carrier Frequency Selection: C6-02

Fixed Carrier Frequencies
The carrier frequency can be set using parameter C6-02 as shown in table below.
Parameter
C6-02
Name
Description
1 : 2.0 kHz
2 : 5.0 kHz
3 : 8.0 kHz
4 : 10.0 kHz
5 : 12.5 kHz
6 : 15.0 kHz
7: Swing PWM
F : User defined (C6-03 to C6-05)
Carrier
frequency
Setting Range
Default
1 to F
Depends on
drive size
Note:
Settings 7 through A for parameter C6-02 use a Swing PWM equivalent to a 2 kHz audible noise. This
function turns the motor noise into a less obtrusive white noise.
Note:
The upper limit for the carrier frequency is determined by drive capacity.
Precautions when setting parameter C6-02:

Symptom
Possible Solution
Speed and torque are unstable at low speeds.

Noise from the drive is affecting peripheral devices.
Excessive leakage current from the drive.
Lower the carrier frequency.
Wiring between the drive and motor is too long. <1>

Motor acoustic noise is too loud.
<1>
Increase the carrier frequency or use Swing PWM.
The carrier frequency may need to be lowered if the motor cable is too long. Refer to the table below.
Wiring Distance
Up to 50 m
Up to 100 m
Greater than 100 m
C6-02 (Carrier Frequency Selection)
1 to F (15 kHz)
1 to 2 (5 kHz), 7
1 (2 kHz), 7
Carrier Frequency Setting Error (oPE11)
A carrier frequency setup error (oPE11) will occur when carrier frequency gain (C6-05) is
greater than 6 and C6-03 < C6-04.
Note:
Refer to Troubleshooting without Fault Display on page 151 for information on operator errors (oPE).
n Carrier Frequency and Drive Overload Current Level

The tables below show the drive output current depending on the carrier frequency settings.
The 2 kHz value is equal to the Normal Duty (C6-01 = 1) rated current, the 8/10 kHz value
is equal to the Heavy Duty rated current. The carrier frequency determines the output current
linearly. Use the data below to calculate output current values for carrier frequencies not listed
in the tables.
Note:
96
In Heavy Duty mode the maximum rated output current is equal to the 8/10 kHz value, even if the carrier
frequency is reduced.
4.5 Basic Operation

Table 4.5 Drives with Heavy Duty Default Carrier Frequency of 10 kHz
200 V Single Phase Units
200 V Three Phase Units
Rated Current [A]
Rated Current [A]
Drive
Model
2 kHz
10 kHz
15 kHz
Drive
Model
2 kHz
10 kHz
15 kHz
BA0001
1.2
0.8
0.6
2A0001
1.2
0.8
0.6
BA0002
1.9
1.6
1.3
2A0002
1.9
1.6
1.3
BA0003
3.5
3.0
2.4
2A0004
3.5
3.0
2.4
BA0006
6.0
5.0
4.0
2A0006
6.0
5.0
4.0
Table 4.6 Drives with Heavy Duty Default Carrier Frequency of 8 kHz
Rated Current [A]
Drive
Model
2 kHz
BA0010
9.6
8.0
Rated Current [A]
Drive
Model
2 kHz
6.4
2A0010
9.6
2A0012

Rated Current [A]
Drive
Model
2 kHz
4A0001
1.2
1.2
0.7
8.0
6.4
4A0002
2.1
1.8
1.1
12.0
11.0
8.8
4A0004
4.1
3.4
2.0
4A0005
5.4
4.8
2.9
2A0020
19.6
17.5
14.0
4A0007
6.9
5.5
3.3
4A0009
8.8
7.2
4.3
4A0011
11.1
9.2
5.5
8 kHz 15 kHz
8 kHz 15 kHz
8 kHz 15 kHz
& Operation
200 V Single Phase Units
u Multi-Step Speed Operation (4-Step Speed)

Select up to 9 preset references (including Jog reference) using two multi-function inputs S4
and S5. Two multi-step references can be selected using two multi-function inputs as
illustrated in Figure 4.14.
n Multi-Step Speed Operation Parameters

No.
Name
Description
d1-01
Frequency reference. o1-03 determines the units, with Hz as the default.
d1-02
Frequency reference when multi-function input Multi-Step Speed Reference 1"

(H1- = 3) is on. Setting unit: set by o1-03.
d1-03
Frequency reference when multi-function input Multi-Step Speed Reference 2

(H1- = 4) is on. Setting unit: set by o1-03.
d1-04
Frequency reference when multi-function input Multi-Step Speed Reference 1,

2" (H1- = 3 and 4) are both on. Setting unit: set by o1-03.
97
4.5 Basic Operation
n Digital Input
Terminal
Parameter
Setting
S4
H1-04
Multi-Step Speed Reference 2
Contents
S5
H1-05
n Wiring Example
Set up external switches SW1 and SW2.
Three-Phase, 200 Vac
(400 Vac)
Drive
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
SW1
S4
SW2
S5
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
SC
Figure 4.14 Control Terminals for 4 Multi-Step Speeds
98
4.5 Basic Operation

Freq Ref 4
Frequency
Reference
Freq Ref 3
Freq Ref 2
Freq Ref 1
Forward/Reverse Run/Stop
ON
OFF
Multi-Step Speed 2
OFF
ON
ON
ON
& Operation
Multi-Step Speed 1
Figure 4.15 4-Step Speed Time Chart
n Setting Procedure
Step
1.
2.
Set the frequencies listed below to the specified parameters:

1. d1-01 = 5 Hz: Step 1 <1>
2. d1-02 = 20 Hz: Step 2
3. d1-03 = 50 Hz: Step 3
4. d1-04 = 60 Hz: Step 4
3.
4.
Press the
Display/Result
key until the initial display appears.
turns on.
99
4.5 Basic Operation

Step
5.
Press
to select LOCAL. The LO/RE light will turn on.
Press
to run the motor at 5 Hz. The RUN light will turn on.
Display/Result
STOP
STOP
6.
Off
7.
With SW1 closed, the drive runs the motor at Multi-Step Speed 2
(20 Hz).
8.
With SW1 open and SW2 closed, the drive runs the motor at
Multi-Step 3 (50 Hz).
9.
With both SW1 and SW2 closed, the drive runs the motor at
Multi-Step 4 (60 Hz).
On
STOP
STOP
10. Press
to stop the drive. The RUN light will flash until the
motor comes to a complete stop.
Flashing
<1>
When the frequency reference is assigned to the LED operator (b1-01=0), the first step in a multi-step speed
sequence comes from d1-01.
Note:
100
Off
When a run command is input from the control circuit terminal, the frequency reference value is selected
as follows:
When b1-01 = 0 and the run command is given, the drive uses the frequency set to d1-01.
When b1-01 = 1 and the run command is given, the drive uses the frequency reference value input to
analog control terminal A1.
4.5 Basic Operation
u E1: V/f Characteristics

n E1-01: Input Voltage Setting
Set the input voltage parameter to the nominal voltage of the AC power supply. This parameter
adjusts the levels of some protective features of the drive (overvoltage, Stall Prevention, etc.).
NOTICE: Set parameter E1-01 to match the input voltage of the drive. Drive input voltage (not motor voltage)
must be set in E1-01 for the protective features of the drive to function properly. Failure to comply could result
in improper drive operation.
No.
Parameter Name
Setting Range
Default
E1-01 <1>
Input Voltage Setting
155 to 255 V
230 V
<1>
The setting range and default value shown here are for 200 V class drives. Double this for 400 V class units.
(Approximate Values)
Voltage
Setting Value of E1-01
ov Detection
Level
BTR Operation
Level
Uv Detection Level
200 V Class
All settings
410 V
394 V
190 V
(single-phase = 160 V)
Setting 400 V
820 V
788 V
380 V
Setting < 400 V
740 V
708 V
350 V
400 V Class
Note:
The braking transistor operation levels are valid for the drive internal braking transistor. If an external
CDBR braking chopper is used, refer to the instruction manual of that unit.
n V/f Pattern Settings

The drive utilizes a set V/f pattern to determine the appropriate output voltage level for each
relative to the frequency reference.
V/f Pattern Setup for V/f Control
1.
2.
Set the input voltage for the drive. Refer to E1-01: Input Voltage Setting on page
222.
Set the V/f pattern. Refer to V/f Pattern Settings E1-04 to E1-10 on page 222.
101
& Operation
E1-01 Related Values
The input voltage setting determines the over-/undervoltage detection level and the operation
levels of the braking transistor.
4.5 Basic Operation
n V/f Pattern Setting Examples

This section provides examples of how to set a V/f pattern using E1-04 to E1-10.
Table 4.7 V/f Pattern Examples
Example
Specification
50 Hz
60 Hz (default setting)
60 Hz (with 50 Hz base)
50 Hz, Heavy Duty 2
50 Hz, Heavy Duty 1
50 Hz, Heavy Duty 1
50 Hz, Heavy Duty 2
50 Hz, mid starting torque
50 Hz, high starting torque
60 Hz, mid starting torque
60 Hz, high starting torque
Characteristic
Application
Constant torque
For general purpose applications. Torque

remains constant regardless of changes to
speed.
Derated torque
For fans, pumps, and other applications

that require torque derating relative to the
load.
High starting torque
Constant output
Select high starting torque when:

Wiring between the drive an motor
exceeds 150 m
A large amount of starting torque is
required
An AC reactor is installed
When operating at greater than 60 Hz the
output voltage will be constant.
The following tables show details on V/f patterns.

The following graphs are for 200 V class drives. Double the values when using a 400 V class
drive.
V/f Pattern Examples
Table 4.8 Constant Torque Characteristics, Examples A to D
16
12
0 1.3 2.5
50
Frequency (Hz)
102
60 Hz
(default)
200
16
12
0 1.5 3
60
Frequency (Hz)
Example C
60 Hz
200
16
12
0 1.5 3
50 60
Frequency (Hz)
Example D
72 Hz
200
Voltage (V)
Voltage (V)
200
Example B
Voltage (V)
50 Hz
Voltage (V)
Example A
16
12
0 1.5 3
60 72
Frequency (Hz)
4.5 Basic Operation

Table 4.9 Derated Torque Characteristics, Examples E to H
50 Hz
Example F
Example G
35
50
9
Example H
50
9
8
0 1.5
60 Hz
200
35
0 1.3
25
50
Frequency (Hz)
0 1.3
25
50
Frequency (Hz)
60 Hz
200
Voltage (V)
Voltage (V)
Voltage (V)
50 Hz
200
200
Voltage (V)
Example E
30
60
Frequency (Hz)
0 1.5
30
60
Frequency (Hz)
Table 4.10 High Starting Torque, Examples I to L
Example J
50 Hz
Example K
12
0 1.3 2.5
50
Frequency (Hz)
Voltage (V)
19
60 Hz
Example L
24
13
19
12
0 1.3 2.5
50
Frequency (Hz)
60 Hz
200
200
200
Voltage (V)
Voltage (V)
200
24
15
0 1.5 3
60
Frequency (Hz)
0 1.5 3
60
Frequency (Hz)
Table 4.11 Rated Output Operation, Examples M to O
90 Hz
Example N
120 Hz
Example O
16
12
16
4
16
12
12
0 1.5 3
60 90
Frequency (Hz)
180 Hz
200
200
Voltage (V)
Voltage (V)
200
Voltage (V)
Example M
0 1.5 3
60 180
Frequency (Hz)
0 1.5 3
60 120
Frequency (Hz)
n V/f Pattern Settings E1-04 to E1-10

Set up the V/f pattern as shown in Figure 4.16.
No.
Parameter Name
Setting Range
Default
E1-04
Maximum Output Frequency
40.0 to 400.0 Hz
60 Hz
E1-05
Maximum Voltage
0.0 to 255.0 V <1>
230 V
E1-06
Base Frequency
0.0 to 400.0 Hz
60 Hz
& Operation
50 Hz
Voltage (V)
Example I
103
4.5 Basic Operation

No.
Parameter Name
Setting Range
E1-07
Middle Output Frequency
0.0 to 400.0 Hz
3.0 Hz
E1-08
Middle Output Frequency Voltage
0.0 to 255.0 V <1>
18.4 V
E1-09
Minimum Output Frequency
E1-10
Minimum Output Frequency Voltage
0.0 to 400.0 Hz
0.0 to 255.0 V <1>
13.8 V
<1>
Default
1.5 Hz
Values shown here are for 200 V class drives; double the values for 400 V class drives.
Output Voltage (V)

E1-05
E1-08
E1-10
E1-09
E1-07 E1-06
Frequency (Hz)
E1-04
Figure 4.16 V/f Pattern

Note:
1. The following condition must be true when setting up the V/f pattern: E1-09 E1-07 < E1-06
E1-04
2. To make the V/f pattern a straight line set E1-09 = E1-07. In this case the E1-08 setting is disregarded.
3. E1-03 is unaffected when the drive is initialized using parameter A1-03, but the settings for E1-04
through E1-10 are returned to their default values.
u Motor Parameters: E2-01 to E2-03

n Setting Motor Parameters
The following table provides instructions on how to set motor parameters. Refer to the motor
data sheet for the correct motor data.
No.
Parameter Name
Setting Method
E2-01
Motor Rated Current
Sets the motor nameplate full load current in amperes (A).
E2-02
Motor Rated Slip
Calculate and set the motor rated slip based on the rated speed described on the
motor nameplate.
Motor rated slip = Motor rated frequency [Hz] - Rated speed [r/min] x No. of
motor poles / 120.
104
4.5 Basic Operation

No.
Parameter Name
Setting Method
E2-03
Motor No-Load Current
Set motor no-load current at rated voltage and rated frequency.

Contact the motor manufacturer to get the no-load current. This information is
not usually written on the motor nameplate.
The default no-load current is for a Yaskawa 4-pole motor.
E2-05
Motor Line-to-Line
Resistance
Sets the phase-to-phase motor resistance in ohms.
u Digital Output: H2-01

Parameter H2-01 assigns functions to digital output terminals MA, MB, and MC. Set this
parameter as required by the application. Default value is listed below.
NOTICE: Do not assign a function that repeats ON/OFF frequently to terminals MA and MB. Failure to comply
will reduce the relay contact lifetime. The expected number of relay contact switching times is normally
200,000 times (current 1 A, resistance load).
Note:
Parameter Name
Terminal MA, MB and MC Function Selection (relay)
Default
E: Fault
The setting range for H2-01 is 0 to 13D. Refer to Parameter List on page 213 for more information.
Multi-Function Contact Outputs
250 Vac, 10 mA - 1 A
30 Vdc, 10 mA - 1 A
(standard default setting)
MA Fault
MB
MC Fault
Figure 4.17 Digital Output Connection Diagram
u Analog Outputs: H4-01 to H4-03

Group U parameters can be used to observe the drive status (operating conditions) through
the LED operator. Analog outputs corresponding to these monitors can be obtained on analog
output terminal AM when programmed with parameter group H4. Some Group U monitors
are not available as analog outputs.
& Operation
No.
H2-01
105
4.5 Basic Operation

No.
Parameter Name
Description
H4-01
Terminal AM Monitor
Selection
Select the data to output through multi-function analog output terminal AM.
Set the desired monitor parameter to the digits available in U-. For
example, enter 103 for U1-03.
When using this terminal as a through terminal or when not using it at all, set
000 or 031.
H4-02
<1>
Terminal AM Output Gain
Sets the voltage level gain of terminal AM. The bias to be added ranges from
0 to +/- 10% when 10 V is assumed to be 100%.
H4-03
<1>
Terminal AM Bias Setting
Sets the voltage level bias for terminal AM.

The bias added is 0 to 10% with a maximum voltage output of 10 V as 100%.
<1>
The parameter can be changed during run.
n Changing Analog Output Settings

The following example illustrates how to program analog output terminal AM to generate a
signal proportional to drive output current (monitor U1-03).
Using H4-01 to Display Monitor Contents
Step
1.
Display/Result
2.
Press
3.
Press
4.
Press
5.
Press
6.
Press
7.
until the Parameter setting menu is displayed.

to enter the Parameter setting menu.
and
to select H4-01.
to display the value currently set to H4-01.

and
to set the output current (103).
Save the setting by pressing
8.
The display automatically returns to the parameter setting menu.
9.
Press the
key until back at the Top Screen.
Adjusting the Analog Output Terminal Voltage with H4-02 and H4-03
Note:
106
This example continues from Step 3 in the previous example.
4.5 Basic Operation

Step
1.
2.
Display/Result
Select H4-02 or H4-03 by pressing the
and
keys.
Press the
key while the drive is stopped and the following
voltage is output for adjustment:
Output voltage = (10 V x Output Gain (H4-02) + Output Bias (H4-03).
Using this output, adjust output gain (H4-02) and output bias (H4-03).
Bias 30%
Gain 100%
Gain 150%
Bias 0%
Gain 100%
Bias 0%
5V
10 V
Terminal AM
output
voltage
Gain 50%
Bias 0%
Bias 0%
Gain 100%
3V
& Operation
10 V
Terminal AM
output
voltage
0V
0V
0%
Monitor value
100%
0%
Monitor value
100%
Figure 4.18 Analog Output Gain/Bias Setting
u Motor Protection: L1-01 and L1-02

This section explains how to set motor overload protection.
n Electronic Thermal Motor Protection

The drive has built-in electronic thermal overload protection to detect overload conditions.
This protection meets standards set by UL and cUL for motor thermal overload protection.
The protective feature is activated when the output current rises above the motor rated current
for a specified time. This speed sensitive protective feature interrupts the motor current to
protect the motor wiring and windings in the event of overload, eliminating the need for an
external overload device. When multiple motors are used with a single drive, separate overload
devices are required to properly protect the individual motor branches.
107
4.5 Basic Operation

Related Parameters
No.
Parameter
Name
Rated
E2-01 Motor
Current
Description
Sets the motor nameplate full load current in
amperes (A). This set value becomes the
reference value for motor protection, torque
limit, and torque control.
Setting Range
10 to 200% of drive rated Determined by

current
o2-04 and C6-01
0 to 2
Motor
L1-01 Overload
Protection
Selection
Enables or disables motor thermal overload

protection (oL1)
0: Disabled
1: Protection for general purpose motor
2: Protection for inverter motor
Motor
L1-02 Overload
Protection
Time
Sets the electronic thermal overload protection

detection time in the motor overload protection
(oL1) function.
This setting rarely needs to be changed and
should be set in accordance with the overload
tolerance of the motor.
Note:
Default
Setting
Use L1-13 (Continuous Electrothermal

Operation Selection) to select whether
electronic thermal value is held or not
held when the power supply is turned off.
When connecting several motors to one
drive, set 0 (disabled) and install a thermal
relay on each motor.
0.1 to 20.0
8.0 min
Executing C6-01 (Duty Cycle) changes motor parameters E2 including motor rated current to the values
of the maximum applicable motor.
Setting Procedure
1. Set E2-01 (Motor Rated Current) to the motor rated current.
2.
Values set for the current become the base current for electronic thermal overload
protection.
Set the proper motor protection level to L1-01.
The ability of the cooling fan to keep an induction motor cool varies by the speed
control range. Protection characteristics of the electronic thermal overload protection
should be set accordingly. Refer to Table 4.12 for motor types and overload
tolerances.
NOTICE: When connecting multiple motors to one drive, disable the electronic overload protection
of the drive (L1-01 = 0) and protect each motor with its own motor thermal overload. Failure to
comply could result in improper drive operation.
NOTICE: Inadequate motor protection could result in damage to the motor. Configure a motor
thermal overload to disconnect main power to the drive when tripped. When using a thermal relay,
disable the motor protection function (L1-01 = 0).
108
4.5 Basic Operation

Table 4.12 Motor Type and Overload Tolerances
Motor Type
GeneralPurpose
Motor
(Standard
Self-Cooled)
150
60 sec.
Drive
Dedicated
Motor
(Constant
Torque, 1:10)
Torque (%)
Cooling Ability
Overload
Characteristics
Motor designed to operate

from line power.
Motor cooling is most
effective when running at
rated nameplate base
frequency (check the motor
specifications).
Operating continuously
at less than line power
frequency can trigger
motor overload
protection (oL1). A fault
is then output and the
motor will coast to stop.
Motor is designed to
effectively cool itself at
speeds as low as 6 Hz.
Continuous operation
with 100% load from 6
Hz to 50/60 Hz.
Overload Tolerance
Rated Speed=100% Speed
100
55
50
Continuous
D
B
0 110
100120 167 200

(60 Hz)
Speed (%)
Notes on Motor Protection
Motor protection meeting UL and cUL standards is achieved with the motor overload
protection time (L1-02) set to factory default setting. Normally, L1-02 (Motor Overload
Protection Time) does not require setting. If the motor overload tolerance is clear, set the
overload protection time at hot start according to the motor. To detect overload earlier,
decrease the setting.
Figure 4.19 illustrates motor protection operation time characteristics.
Operation Time (minutes)
10
7
3
Cold Start
1
0.4
Hot Start
0.1
0
100
150
200
Motor Current (%)

E2-01 = 100%
Figure 4.19 Motor Protection Operation
109
& Operation
L1-01
Setting
4.5 Basic Operation

Disable motor protection (L1-01 = 1) when running multiple motors from the same drive.
Attach a thermal relay for each motor to provide overload protection.
Use L1-13 (Continuous Electrothermal Operation Selection) to select whether the
electrothermal value is held or not held when power supply is turned off. Default setting
is 1 (Enabled).
In the case of a general purpose (standard) motor, the cooling capability is reduced at a low
speed. Motor overload protection (oL1) may occur in frequencies lower than motor rated
current. Use an exclusive-use or inverter-duty motor to operate the drive at rated current at
low frequency.
u Drive Status Monitors: U1-01 to U4-13

Parameter group U displays various data regarding the operating status of the drive.
The following example demonstrates viewing output voltage reference (U1-06).
Step
1.
Display/Result
2.
Press
3.
Press
4.
Press
5.
until Monitor Display appears.

to enter the Parameter Setting Screen.
until U1-06 appears.
Press
to display the voltage reference. The Output Voltage
Reference appears.
Refer to Parameter List on page 213 for more details about Drive Status Monitors.
Table 4.13 Drive Status Monitors
No.
Parameter Name
Page
No.
Parameter Name
Page
U1-01 Frequency Reference
235
U1-19 MEMOBUS/Modbus Error Code
236
U1-02 Output Frequency
235
U1-25 Software Number (ROM)
236
U1-03 Output Current
235
U1-26 Software Number (Flash)
236
U1-06 Output Voltage Reference
235
U2-01 Current Fault
236
U1-07 DC Bus Voltage
235
U2-02 Previous Fault
236
U1-10 Input Terminal Status
236
U4-01 Accumulated Operation Time
237
U1-11 Output Terminal Status
236
U4-04 Cooling Fan Maintenance
237
U1-13 Terminal A1 Input Voltage
236
U4-05 Capacitor Maintenance
237
110
4.5 Basic Operation

No.
Parameter Name
Page
No.
Parameter Name
Page
237
U4-09 LED Check
237
U4-08 Heatsink Temperature
237
U4-13 Peak Hold Current
237
& Operation
U4-07 IGBT Maintenance
111
4.6 Powering Up the Drive
4.6
Powering Up the Drive
u Powering Up the Drive and Operation Status Display

n Powering Up the Drive
Review the following checklist before turning the power on.
Item to Check
Power supply voltage
Description
Ensure the power supply voltage is correct:
200 V class: single-phase 200 to 240 Vac 50/60 Hz
200 V class: 3-phase 200 to 240 Vac 50/60 Hz
400 V class: 3-phase 380 to 480 Vac 50/60 Hz
Properly wire the power supply input terminals (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3).
(for single-phase 200 V class models, wire only R/L1 and S/L2)
Check for proper grounding of drive and motor.
Drive output terminals

and motor terminals
Properly wire drive output terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3 with motor terminals U, V,
and W.
Control circuit
terminals
Check control circuit terminal connections.
Drive control terminal

status
Open all control circuit terminals (off).
Status of the load

and connected
machinery
Uncouple the motor from the load.
n Status Display
When the power supply to the drive is turned on, the LED operator lights will appear as
follows:
No.
Name
Description
Normal
Operation
The data display area displays the frequency reference.
Fault
STOP
Main circuit low voltage (ex)
is lit.
Data displayed varies by the type of fault. Refer to Fault Displays,

Causes, and Possible Solutions on page 130 for more information and
and
are lit.
possible solution.
STOP
112
4.6 Powering Up the Drive
u V/f Pattern Setting

Setting the V/f pattern according to the application. for details on setting the V/f pattern.
n Notes when Setting the V/f Pattern

Set the maximum output frequency to match the motor characteristics.
& Operation
If the V/f pattern voltage is increased motor torque may also increase. However, if the V/f
voltage is set too high these problems may occur:
Excessive motor current.
Motor overheat or vibration.
113
4.7 No-Load Operation Test Run
4.7
No-Load Operation Test Run
u No-Load Operation Test Run

This section explains how to operate the drive with the motor uncoupled from the load during
a test run.
n Before Starting the Motor

Check the following items before operation:
Ensure the area around the motor is safe.
Ensure external emergency stop circuitry is working properly and other safety precautions
have been taken.
n During Operation
Check the following items during operation:
The motor should rotate smoothly (i.e., no abnormal noise or oscillation).
The motor should accelerate and decelerate smoothly.
n No-Load Operation Instructions

The following example illustrates a test run procedure using the digital operator.
Note:
Before starting the motor, set the frequency reference d1-01 to 6 Hz.
Step
Display/Result
2. Press the
on.
114
key to select LOCAL. The LO/RE LED will turn
STOP
4.7 No-Load Operation Test Run

Step
Display/Result
STOP
3. Press
to give the drive a Run command. RUN will light and
the motor will rotate at 6 Hz.
Off
On
Motor
the motor is rotating in the correct direction and no faults or

4. Ensure
alarms occur.
Forward
& Operation
If there is no error in step 4, press

to increase the frequency
5. reference. Increase the frequency in 10 Hz increments verifying
smooth operation results at all speeds. For each frequency, monitor
the drive output current (U1-03) through the LED operator to confirm
the current is well below the motor rated current.
STOP
STOP
6. The drive should operate normally. Press

to stop the motor.
RUN flashes until the motor comes to a complete stop.
Flashing
Off
115
4.8 Test Run with Load Connected
4.8
Test Run with Load Connected
u Test Run with the Load Connected

After performing a no-load test run connect the load and proceed to run the motor and load
together.
n Notes on Connected Machinery
Clear the area around the motor.

The motor should come to a complete stop without problems.
Connect the machinery.
Fasten all installation screws properly. Check that the motor and connected machinery are
held in place.
Confirm that the Fast-stop circuit or mechanical safety measures operate correctly.
Be ready to press the STOP button in case of emergency.
n Checklist Before Operation

The motor should rotate in the proper direction.
The motor should accelerate and decelerate smoothly.
n Operating the Motor under Loaded Conditions

Test run the application similarly to the no-load test procedure when connecting the machinery
to the motor.
Check monitor parameter U1-03 to ensure there is no overcurrent.
If the application permits running the load in the reverse direction, try changing motor
direction and the frequency reference while watching for abnormal motor oscillation or
vibration.
Correct any problems that occurs with hunting, oscillation, or other control-related
issues.
116
4.9 Verifying and Backing Up Parameter Settings
4.9
Verifying and Backing Up Parameter

Settings
Check changes to parameter settings using the Verify function. Refer to Verifying Parameter
Changes: Verify Menu on page 84.
Save the verified parameter settings. Change the access level or set a password to the drive to
prevent accidental modification of parameter settings.
u Parameter Access Level: A1-01
No.
Parameter
Name
Level
A1-01 Access
Selection
Description
Setting
Range
Default
Selects which parameters are accessible via the digital operator.

0: Operation only (A1-01 and A1-04 can be set and monitored. U
parameters can be monitored)
2: Advanced Access Level (All parameters can be set and monitored)
0, 2
u Password Settings: A1-04, A1-05

The user can set a password to the drive to restrict access. The password is selected via
parameter A1-05. The selected password must be entered in parameter A1-04 to unlock
parameter access (i.e., parameter setting A1-04 must match the value programmed into
A1-05). The following parameters cannot be viewed or edited until the value programmed
into A1-04 correctly matches the value as programmed in parameter A1-05: A1-01 and A1-03.
Note:
Parameter A1-05 is hidden from view. To display A1-05, access parameter A1-04 and simultaneously
depress the
key and the
key.
u Copy Function (Optional)

Parameter settings can be copied to another drive to simplify parameter restoration or multiple
drive setup. The RS-232C Interface Unit (Removable Type) (SI-232/JC) is required to use
the following options with J1000 drives:
n USB/Copy Unit (JVOP-181)

The copy unit is an external option connected to the drive to copy parameter settings to another
drive. It includes a USB adapter to connect the drive to a PC.
117
& Operation
Setting the Access Level for Operation only (A1-01 = 0) allows the user to access parameters
A1- and U- only. Other parameters are not displayed.
4.9 Verifying and Backing Up Parameter Settings
n LED Operator (JVOP-182)

The LED operator operates the drive and supports copying, importing, and verifying parameter
settings.
Note:
Use of the LED operator requires that the drive is running drive software version PRG: 1010 or later.
n Drive Wizard Plus

Drive Wizard Plus is a PC software tool for parameter management, monitoring, and
diagnosis. Drive Wizard Plus can load, store, and copy drive parameter settings. For details,
refer to Help in the Drive Wizard Plus software.
The installation files can be obtained at no charge from:
U.S.: http://www.yaskawa.com
118
4.10 Test Run Checklist

Review the checklist before performing a test run. Check each item that applies.
No.
Checklist
Page
Thoroughly read the manual before performing a test run.
Turn the power on.
112
Set the voltage for the power supply to E1-01.
101
Check the items that correspond to the control mode being used.
WARNING! Ensure start/stop and safety circuits are wired properly and in the correct state before energizing
the drive. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury from moving equipment. When programmed
for 3-Wire control, a momentary closure on terminal S1 may cause the drive to start.
Checklist
The
should illuminate after giving a run command.
Page
To give a run command and frequency reference from the LED Digital Operator, press
5
85
to set to LOCAL. The LO/RE key lights while LOCAL is displayed.
If the motor rotates in the opposite direction during the test run, switch two of the drive
output terminals (U/T1, V/T2, W/T3).
112
Select the correct duty rating (C6-01) for the application.
Set the correct values for the motor rated current (E2-01) and the motor protection
selection (L1-01) to ensure motor thermal protection.
If the run command and frequency reference are provided via the control circuit
terminals, set the drive for REMOTE and be sure the LO/RE light is out.
85
10
If the control circuit terminals should supply the frequency reference, select the correct
voltage input signal level (0 to 10 V) or the correct current input signal level (4 to 20
mA or 0 to 20 mA).
85
11
Set the proper voltage to terminal A1. (0 to 10 V).
88
12
When current input is used, switch the drive built-in DIP switch S1 from the V-side
(OFF) to I-side (ON).
13
Set the minimum and maximum frequency references to the desired values. Make the
following adjustments if the drive does not operate as expected:
Gain adjustment: Set the maximum voltage/current signal and adjust the analog input
gain (H3-03) until the frequency reference value reaches the desired value.
Bias adjustment: Set the minimum voltage/current signal and adjust the analog input
bias (H3-04) until the frequency reference value reaches the desired minimum value.
& Operation
No.
119
This Page Intentionally Blank
120
5
Troubleshooting
This chapter provides descriptions of the drive faults, alarms,
errors, related displays, and possible solutions. This chapter can
also serve as a reference guide for tuning the drive during a trial
run.
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
SECTION SAFETY...........................................122
MOTOR PERFORMANCE FINE TUNING..........125
DRIVE ALARMS, FAULTS, AND ERRORS.......127
FAULT DETECTION........................................ 130
ALARM DETECTION.......................................141
OPERATOR PROGRAMMING ERRORS.......... 147
DIAGNOSING AND RESETTING FAULTS........149
TROUBLESHOOTING WITHOUT FAULT
DISPLAY.........................................................151
121
5.1 Section Safety
5.1
Section Safety
DANGER

WARNING
The diagrams in this section may illustrate drives without covers or safety shields to display
motor case.
Do not touch terminals before the capacitors have fully discharged.
remains charged even after the drive input power is turned off. The charge indicator LED
will extinguish when the DC bus voltage is below 50 Vdc. To prevent electric shock, wait
at least one minute after all indicators are off and measure the DC bus voltage level to confirm
safe level.
Installation, maintenance, inspection and servicing must be performed only by authorized
122
5.1 Section Safety
WARNING
Do not perform work on the drive while wearing loose clothing, jewelry, or without
eye protection.
Remove all metal objects such as watches and rings, secure loose clothing and wear eye
Verify that the rated voltage of the drive matches the voltage of the incoming drive input
power before applying power.
Troubleshooting
Fire Hazard
123
5.1 Section Safety
NOTICE
circuit boards.
voltage.
to the drive.
Yaskawa is not responsible for modification of the product made by the user.
Check all the wiring after installing the drive and connecting other devices to ensure
that all connections are correct.
124
5.2 Motor Performance Fine Tuning
5.2
Motor Performance Fine Tuning
This section offers helpful information for counteracting oscillation, hunting, or other faults
that occur while performing a trial run.
Note:
This section describes parameters that are commonly edited. Consult Yaskawa for more information on
detailed settings and fine-tuning the drive.
u Parameters for Tuning the Drive

Problem
Parameter
Corrective Action
If insufficient motor torque relative to the

size of the load causes hunting, reduce the
setting.
Motor hunting and
Hunting
When motor hunting and oscillation occur
oscillation at speeds Prevention
Gain
with a light load, increase the setting.
between 10 and 40
(n1-02)
Lower this setting if hunting occurs when
Hz
using a motor with a relatively low
inductance, such as a high-frequency motor
or a motor with a larger frame size.
Motor noise
Motor hunting and
oscillation at speeds
up to 40 Hz
Carrier
Frequency
Selection
(C6-02)
Poor motor torque at

speeds below 10 Hz
Motor hunting and
oscillation
Torque
Compensation
Gain (C4-01)
Note:
Slip
Compensation
Gain (C3-01)
Suggested
Setting
1.00
0.00 to 2.00
If the motor noise is too loud, increase the

carrier frequency.
When motor hunting and oscillation occur
at speeds up to 40 Hz, lower the carrier
7 (Swing
frequency.
PWM)
The default setting for the carrier frequency
depends on the drive capacity (o2-04) and
the Drive Duty Selection (C6-01).
If motor torque is insufficient at speeds
below 10 Hz, increase the setting.
If motor hunting and oscillation with a
relatively light load, decrease the setting.
If torque is insufficient at speeds below 10

Mid Output
Hz, increase the setting.
Poor motor torque at
Voltage A
If motor instability occurs at motor start,
low speeds
(E1-08)
decrease the setting.
Minimum
Motor instability at
Output Voltage Note: The recommended setting value is for
motor start
200 V class drives. Double this value when
(E1-10)
using a 400 V class drive.
Poor speed
precision
Default
Value
After setting the motor-rated current

(E2-01), motor-rated slip (E2-02) and motor
no-load current (E2-03), adjust the slip
compensation gain (C3-01).
1.00
1 to 7
0.50 to 1.50
5
E1-08:
18.4 V
E1-10:
13.8 V
Initial value
5 V
0.5 to 1.5
Use slip compensation to improve speed precision. First make sure that the proper values have been set
for the motor rated current to E2-01, motor rated slip (E2-02), and motor no-load current (E2-03). Next,
adjust the slip compensation gain set to C3-01 so that it is between 0.5 to 1.5.
Troubleshooting
Table 5.1 Parameters for Tuning the Drive
125
5.2 Motor Performance Fine Tuning
u Motor Hunting and Oscillation Control Parameters

The following parameters indirectly affect motor hunting and oscillation.
Table 5.2 Parameters that Affect Control Performance in Applications
Name (Parameter No.)
Application
Accel/Decel Time (C1-01

through C1-09)
Adjusting accel and decel times will affect the torque presented to the motor during
acceleration or deceleration.
S-Curve Characteristics
(C2-01 through C2-04)
Prevents shock at the beginning and end of acceleration and deceleration.
Jump Frequency (d3-01

through d3-04)
Skips over the resonant frequencies of connected machinery.
Analog Filter Time Constant

(H3-13)
Prevents fluctuation in the analog input signal due to noise.
Stall Prevention (L3-01

through L3-06)
Prevents motor speed loss and overvoltage. Used when the load is too heavy and
also during sudden acceleration/deceleration.
Adjustment is not normally required because Stall Prevention is enabled as a
default. Disable Stall Prevention during deceleration (L3-04 = 0) when using
a braking resistor.
126
5.3 Drive Alarms, Faults, and Errors
5.3
Drive Alarms, Faults, and Errors
u Types of Alarms, Faults, and Errors

Check the LED operator for information about possible faults if the drive or motor fails to
operate. Refer to Using the Digital LED Operator on page 73.
If problems occur that are not covered in this manual, contact the nearest Yaskawa
representative with the following information:
Drive model
Software version
Date of purchase
Description of the problem
Table 5.3 contains descriptions of the various types of alarms, faults, and errors that may occur
while operating the drive.
Contact Yaskawa in the event of drive failure.
Table 5.3 Types of Alarms, Faults, and Errors
Faults
Drive Responses to Alarms, Faults, and Errors

When the drive detects a fault:
The digital operator displays text that indicates the specific fault and the ALM indicator LED
remains lit until the fault is reset.
The fault interrupts drive output and the motor coasts to a stop.
Depending on the setting, the drive and motor may stop via different methods than listed.
If a digital output is programmed for fault output (H2-01 = E), it will close if a fault occurs.
When the drive detects a fault, it will remain inoperable until that fault has been reset. Refer to
Fault Reset Methods on page 150.
When the drive detects an alarm or a minor fault:

The digital operator displays text that indicates the specific alarm or minor fault and the ALM
indicator LED flashes.
Minor Faults and The motor does not stop.
Alarms
The multi-function contact output closes if set to be tripped by a minor fault (H2-01 = 10), but
not by an alarm.
The digital operator displays text indicating a specific alarm and ALM indicator LED flashes.
Remove the cause of an alarm or minor fault to automatically reset.
When parameter settings conflict with one another or do not match hardware settings (such as
with an option unit), it results in an operation error.
When the drive detects an operation error:
Operation Errors The digital operator displays text that indicates the specific error.
The multi-function contact output does not operate.
When the drive detects an operation error, it will not operate the motor until the error has been
reset. Correct the settings that caused the operation error to reset.
127
Troubleshooting
Type
u Alarm and Error Displays

n Faults
When the drive detects a fault, the ALM indicator LEDs remain lit without flashing. If the
LEDs flash, the drive has detected a minor fault or alarm. Refer to Minor Faults and
Alarms on page 129 for more information. Conditions such as overvoltage or external faults
can trip both faults and minor faults, therefore it is important to note whether the LEDs remain
lit or if the LEDs flash.
Table 5.4 Fault Displays
Digital Operator
Display
or
<1>
Name
CE
MEMOBUS/Modbus
Communication Error
130
CoF
Current Offset Fault
130
CPF11 RAM Fault
130
CPF12 FLASH Memory

Fault
130
CPF00 CPF14 Control Circuit

or
CPF01 Fault
CPF17 Timing Fault
CPF18 Control Circuit
Fault
or
<2>
131
Serial
CPF08 EEPROM
Communications Fault
131
131
CPF20 FLASH Memory Fault

or
Watchdog Circuit
CPF21 Exception
131
131
131
CPF22 A/D Conversion Error
131
CPF23 PWM Feedback Data Fault
132
CPF24 Drive Capacity Signal Fault
132
<3>
Name
Option External Fault
EF1 to External Fault (input

EF5 terminal S1 to S5)
Pg.
132
132
Err
EEPROM Write Error
133
LF
Output Phase Loss
133
oC
Overcurrent
133
oFA01 Option Unit Fault
135
oH1
Heatsink Overheat
135
oL1
Motor Overload
135
oL2
Drive Overload
136
oL3
Overtorque Detection 1
137
oPr
Operator Connection Fault
137
ov
Overvoltage
137
PF
Input Phase Loss
138
rH
Dynamic Braking Resistor
139
Uv1
Undervoltage
139
Uv3
Soft Charge Circuit Fault
140
when occurring at drive power up. When one of the faults occurs after successfully
starting the drive, the display will show
128
<3>
130
Drive Specification
during Terminal
CPF06 Mismatch
Board or Control Board
Replacement
Displayed as
to
130
131
Clock Fault
<1>
EF0
130
CPF02 A/D Conversion Error
RAM Fault
Digital Operator
Display
Pg.

<2>
Displayed as
<3>
starting the drive, the display will show

Uv1 fault is not saved to the fault history
when occurring at drive power up. When one of the faults occurs after successfully
.
n Minor Faults and Alarms

When a minor fault or alarm occurs, the ALM LED flashes and the text display shows an
alarm code. A fault has occurred if the text remains lit and does not flash. Refer to Alarm
Detection on page 141. An overvoltage situation, for example, can trigger both faults and
minor faults. It is therefore important to note whether the LEDs remain lit or if the LEDs flash.
Minor Fault
Output
(H2- = 10)
Pg.
No output
141
Serial Communication Transmission Error
YES
141
MEMOBUS/Modbus Communication Error
YES
141
Can Not Reset
YES
142
Run Command Input Error
YES
142
External Fault (input terminal S1 to S5)
YES
143
oH
Heatsink Overheat
YES
143
oL3
Overtorque 1
YES
144
ov
Overvoltage
YES
144
bb
CALL
CE
CrST
EF
to
EF1 to
EF5
PASS
Name
Drive Baseblock
No output
145
SE
MEMOBUS/Modbus Test Mode Complete

MEMOBUS/Modbus Test Mode Fault
YES
145
Uv
Undervoltage
YES
145
Troubleshooting
Table 5.5 Minor Fault and Alarm Displays

Digital Operator
Display
n Operation Errors
Table 5.6 Operation Error Displays
Digital
Operator
Display
Name
Pg.
Digital
Operator
Display
Name
Pg.
oPE01 Drive Unit Setting Error
147
Command Selection
oPE05 Run
Error
148
Setting Range
oPE02 Parameter
Error
147
oPE10 V/f Data Setting Error
148
147
Frequency Setting
oPE11 Carrier
Error
148
Input Setting
oPE03 Multi-Function
Error
129
5.4 Fault Detection
5.4
Fault Detection
u Fault Displays, Causes, and Possible Solutions

Table 5.7 Detailed Fault Displays, Causes, and Possible Solutions
Digital Operator Display
CE
Fault Name
No data was received for longer than 2 seconds.
Cause
Possible Solution
Check for faulty wiring.

Faulty communications wiring, or a
Correct the wiring.
short circuit exists.
Check for loose wiring and short circuits. Repair as needed.
A communications data error

occurred due to noise.
Check the various options available to minimize the effects of noise.

Counteract noise in control circuit, main circuit, and ground wiring.
Use Yaskawa-recommended cables, or another type of shielded line. Ground
the shield on the controller side or on the drive input power side.
Ensure that other equipment such as switches or relays do not cause noise and
use surge suppressors if required.
Separate all wiring for communications devices from drive input power lines.
Install an EMC noise filter to the input side of the drive input power.
Fault Name
Current Offset Fault
CoF
The current sensor is damaged or there was residual induction current in the motor
(e.g., during sudden deceleration or when coasting) when the drive attempted to
start the motor.
Cause
Possible Solution
Due to residual induction current in

the motor when the drive attempted
to start the motor, the drive
Create a motor restart sequence that allows enough time for the residual induction
attempted to adjust the current
voltage to dissipate.
offset value beyond the allowable
range.
or
CPF00 or
CPF01
Fault Name
CPF11 RAM Fault
CPF12 Problem with the ROM (FLASH memory)
CPF14 CPU error (CPU operates incorrectly due to noise, etc.)
CPF17 A timing error occurred during an internal process
CPF18 CPU error (CPU operates incorrectly due to noise, etc.)
Cause
Hardware is damaged.
130
Possible Solution
Replace the drive.
5.4 Fault Detection

CPF02
Fault Name
A/D Conversion Error
An A/D conversion error occurred.
Cause
Possible Solution
Control circuit is damaged.

Control circuit terminals have
shorted out (+V, AC).
Cycle power to the drive. If the problem continues, replace the drive.
Check for wiring errors along the control circuit terminals.
Correct the wiring.
Check the resistance of the speed potentiometer and related wiring.
Control terminal input current has Check the input current.

exceeded allowable levels.
Reduce the current input to control circuit terminal (+V) to 20 mA.
CPF06
Fault Name
EEPROM Data Error
There is an error in the data saved to EEPROM.
Cause
Possible Solution
Cycle power to the drive. If the problem continues, replace the drive.
The power supply was switched off Cycle power to the drive and check operation again.
when parameters were written (e.g.,
Initialize the drive using A1-03.
using a communications option
If the problem persists after initializing the drive, replace the drive.
card).
CPF08
Fault Name
Troubleshooting
EEPROM Serial Communication Fault

EEPROM communications are not functioning properly.
Cause
Possible Solution
Cycle power to the drive. If the problem persists, replace the drive.
Fault Name
One of the following faults occurred: RAM fault, FLASH memory error,
watchdog circuit exception, clock error
or
CPF20 or
CPF21
RAM fault.
FLASH memory error (ROM error).
Watchdog circuit exception (self-diagnostic error).
Clock error.
Cause
Possible Solution
Replace the drive.

CPF22
Fault Name
A/D Conversion Fault
A/D conversion error.
131
5.4 Fault Detection

Fault Name
Cause
Possible Solution
Cycle power to the drive. Refer to Diagnosing and Resetting Faults on page
149.
If the problem continues, replace the drive.

CPF23
Fault Name
PWM Feedback Fault
PWM feedback error.
Cause
Possible Solution
Replace the drive.

CPF24
Fault Name
Drive Capacity Signal Fault
Entered a capacity that does not exist. (Checked when the drive is powered up.)
Cause
Possible Solution
Replace the drive.

EF0
Cause
Fault Name
MEMOBUS/Modbus Communication External Fault
An external fault condition is present.
Possible Solution
An external fault was received from

the PLC with other than H5-04 = 3 Remove the cause of the external fault.
alarm only (the drive continued Remove the external fault input from the PLC.
to run after external fault).
Problem with the PLC program.
EF1
EF2
EF3
EF4
EF5
132
Check the PLC program and correct problems.

Fault Name
External Fault (input terminal S1)
External fault at multi-function input terminal S1.
5.4 Fault Detection

Fault Name
Cause
Possible Solution
An external device has tripped an

alarm function.
Remove the cause of the external fault and reset the fault.
Wiring is incorrect.
Ensure the signal lines have been connected properly to the terminals assigned
for external fault detection (H1- = 20 to 2F).
Reconnect the signal line.
Incorrect setting of multi-function Check if the unused terminals set for H1- = 20 to 2F (External Fault).
contact inputs.
Change the terminal settings.
Data does not match the EEPROM being written to.
Cause
Possible Solution
Press the ENTER button.

Correct the parameter settings.
Cycle power to the drive. Refer to Diagnosing and Resetting Faults on page
149.

LF
Fault Name
Output Phase Loss
Phase loss on the output side of the drive.
Cause
Possible Solution
The output cable is disconnected.
Check for wiring errors and ensure the output cable is connected properly.
Correct the wiring.
The motor winding is damaged.
Check the resistance between motor lines.

Replace the motor if the winding is damaged.
The output terminal is loose.
Apply the tightening torque specified in this manual to fasten the terminals.
Refer to Wire Size and Torque Specifications on page 55.
The motor being used is less than

5% of the drive rated current.
Check the drive and motor capacities.
An output transistor is damaged.
Replace the drive.
A single-phase motor is being used. The drive being used cannot operate a single phase motor.
Fault Name
Overcurrent
oC
Cause
Drive sensors have detected an output current greater than the specified
overcurrent level.
Possible Solution
133
Troubleshooting
Err
Fault Name
EEPROM Write Error
5.4 Fault Detection

Fault Name
The motor has been damaged due

to overheating or the motor
insulation is damaged.
Check the insulation resistance.

Replace the motor.
Check the motor cables.

One of the motor cables has shorted Remove the short circuit and power the drive back up.
out or there is a grounding problem. Check the resistance between the motor cables and the ground terminal
Replace damaged cables.
The load is too heavy.
Measure the current flowing into the motor.

Replace the drive with a larger capacity unit if the current value exceeds the
rated current of the drive.
Determine if there is sudden fluctuation in the current level.
Reduce the load to avoid sudden changes in the current level or switch to a
larger drive.
The acceleration or deceleration

times are too short.
Calculate the torque needed during acceleration relative to the load inertia and the
specified acceleration time.
If the right amount of torque cannot be set, make the following changes:
Increase the acceleration time (C1-01, C1-03)
Increase the S-curve characteristics (C2-01 through C2-04)
Increase the capacity of the drive.
The drive is attempting to operate a Check the motor capacity.

specialized motor or a motor larger Ensure that the rated capacity of the drive is greater than or equal to the capacity
than the maximum size allowed.
rating found on the motor nameplate.
Magnetic contactor (MC) on the
up the operation sequence so that the MC is not tripped while the drive is
output side of the drive has turned Set
outputting current.
on or off.
V/f setting is not operating as
expected.
Check the ratios between the voltage and frequency.

Set parameters E1-04 through E1-10 appropriately.
Lower the voltage if it is too high relative to the frequency.
Excessive torque compensation.
Check the amount of torque compensation.

Reduce the torque compensation gain (C4-01) until there is no speed loss and
less current.
Review the possible solutions provided for handling noise interference.

Drive fails to operate properly due
Review the section on handling noise interference and check the control circuit
to noise interference.
lines, main circuit lines, and ground wiring.
Check if fault occurs simultaneously to overexcitation function operation.
Overexcitation gain is set too high. Consider motor flux saturation and reduce the value of n3-13 (Overexcitation
Deceleration Gain).
Run command applied while motor Program the Speed Search command input through one of the multi-function
was coasting.
contact input terminals (H1- = 61 or 62).
The motor cable is too long
134
Use a larger drive.
5.4 Fault Detection

oFA01
Fault Name
Option Unit Fault
Replace the option unit.
Cause
Possible Solution
The option unit is not connected

properly to the drive.
Turn the power off and reconnect the option unit.

oH1
Fault Name
Overheat 1 (Heatsink Overheat)
The temperature of the heatsink has exceeded the overheat pre-alarm level.
Cause
Possible Solution
Surrounding temperature is too

high.
Check the temperature surrounding the drive.

Improve the air circulation within the enclosure panel.
Install a fan or air conditioner to cool the surrounding area.
Remove anything near the drive that might be producing excessive heat.
Load is too heavy.
Measure the output current.

Lower the carrier frequency (C6-02).
Reduce the load.
Fault Name
Motor Overload
oL1
The electrothermal sensor tripped overload protection.

Note: The integrated value of the internal register for oL1 must decrease before
oL1 can be reset.
Cause
Possible Solution
Load is too heavy.
Reduce the load.
Cycle times are too short during

acceleration and deceleration.
Increase the acceleration and deceleration times (C1-01 through C1-04).
Drive overloaded at low

speeds.
Overload may occur at low
speeds when using a generalpurpose motor, even if
operating within the rated
current limitation.
Reduce the load.

Increase the speed.
If the drive is supposed to operate at low speeds, either increase the motor
capacity or use a motor specifically designed to operate with the drive.
Although a special type of motor is

being used, the motor protection
Set L1-01 to 2.
selection is set for a generalpurpose motor (L1-01 = 1).
Troubleshooting
Current flowing to control circuit Check the current level of the terminal.
terminal +V exceeded the tolerance
Set the current to the control circuit terminal to be 20 mA or less.
level.
135
5.4 Fault Detection

Fault Name
Voltage is too high for the V/f

characteristics.
Adjust the user set V/f patterns (E1-04 through E1-10). Parameters E1-08 and
E1-10 may need to be reduced.
If E1-08 and E1-10 are set too high, there may be very little load tolerance at
low speed.
The wrong motor-rated current is

set to E2-01.
Check the motor-rated current.

Enter the value written on the motor nameplate to parameter E2-01.
The motor base frequency for the

drive input power is set too low.
Check the rated frequency indicated on the motor nameplate.

Enter the rated frequency to E1-06 (Base Frequency).
Multiple motors are running off the Set L1-01 to 0 to disable the Motor Protection function and install a thermal relay
same drive.
to each motor.
Check the motor characteristics.
The electrical thermal protection
characteristics and motor overload Correct the value set to L1-01 (Motor Protection Function).
characteristics do not match.
Install an external thermal relay.
The electrical thermal relay is
operating at the wrong level.
Check the current rating listed on the motor nameplate.

Check the value set for the motor-rated current (E2-01).
Motor overheated by
overexcitation operation.
Overexcitation increases the motor losses and the motor temperature. If applied
too long, motor damage can occur. Prevent excessive overexcitation operation
or apply proper cooling to the motor
Reduce the excitation deceleration gain (n3-13).
Set L3-04 (Stall Prevention during Deceleration) to a value other than 4.
Output current fluctuation due to

input phase loss
Check the power supply for phase loss.

oL2
Fault Name
Drive Overload
The thermal sensor of the drive triggered overload protection.
Cause
Possible Solution
Load is too heavy.
Reduce the load.
Cycle times are too short during

acceleration and deceleration.
Increase the settings for the acceleration and deceleration times (C1-01 through
C1-04).
Voltage is too high for the V/f

characteristics.
Adjust the preset V/f pattern (E1-04 through E1-10). This will mainly involve
reducing E1-08 and E1-10.
Be careful not to lower E1-08 and E1-10 excessively because this reduces load
tolerance at low speeds.
Drive capacity is too small.
Replace the drive with a larger model.
Reduce the load when operating at low speeds.

Overload occurred when operating Replace the drive with a model that is one frame size larger.
at low speeds.
Excessive torque compensation.
136
Reduce the torque compensation gain (C4-01) until there is no speed loss but less
current.
5.4 Fault Detection

Output current fluctuation due to
input phase loss
Fault Name
Check the power supply for phase loss.
Fault Name
Overtorque Detection 1
oL3
The current has exceeded the value set for torque detection (L6-02) for longer
than the allowable time (L6-03).
Cause
Possible Solution
Parameter settings are not

appropriate for the type of load.
Check the settings of parameters L6-02 and L6-03.
There is a fault on the machine side Check the status of the load. Remove the cause of the fault.
(e.g., the machine is locked up).
Fault Name
External Digital Operator Connection Fault
oPr
The external operator has been disconnected from the drive.

Note: An oPr fault will occur when all of the following conditions are true:
Output is interrupted when the operator is disconnected (o2-06 = 1).
The run command is assigned to the operator
(b1-02 = 0 and LOCAL has been selected).
Possible Solution
External operator is not properly

connected to the drive.
Check the connection between the operator and the drive.

Replace the cable if damaged.
Turn off the drive input power and disconnect the operator. Next reconnect the
operator and turn the drive input power back on.
Fault Name
Overvoltage
ov
Cause
Voltage in the DC bus has exceeded the overvoltage detection level.

For 200 V class: approximately 410 V
For 400 V class: approximately 820 V (740 V when E1-01 is less than 400)
Possible Solution
Increase the deceleration time (C1-02, C1-04).

Deceleration time is too short and Install a braking resistor or a dynamic braking resistor unit.
regenerative energy flows from the
Set L3-04 to 1 to enable stall prevention during deceleration.
motor into the drive.
Stall prevention is enabled as the default setting.
Excessive braking load.
The braking torque was too high, causing regenerative energy to charge the DC
bus.
Reduce the braking torque, use a braking option, or lengthen decel time.
Surge voltage entering from the

drive input power.
Install a DC link choke.

Note: Voltage surge can result from thyristor convertor and phase advancing
capacitor using same drive main input power supply.
137
Troubleshooting
Cause
5.4 Fault Detection

Fault Name
Ground fault in the output circuit

causing the DC bus capacitor to
overcharge.
Check the motor wiring for ground faults.

Correct grounding shorts and turn the power back on.
Excessive regeneration when

Lengthen the S-curve at acceleration end.
overshoot occurs after acceleration.
Drive input power voltage is too
high.
Check the voltage.

Lower drive input power voltage within the limits listed in the specifications.
The dynamic braking transistor is

damaged.
Replace the drive.
The braking transistor is wired

incorrectly.
Check braking transistor wiring for errors.

Properly rewire the braking resistor device.
Review the list of possible solutions provided for controlling noise.

Drive fails to operate properly due
Review the section on handling noise interference and check the control circuit
to noise interference.
lines, main circuit lines and ground wiring.
Adjust the parameters that control hunting.
Set the hunting prevention gain (n1-02).
Motor hunting occurs.

Fault Name
Input Phase Loss
PF
Drive input power has an open phase or has a large imbalance of voltage between
phases. Detected when L8-05 = 1 (enabled).
Cause
Possible Solution
There is phase loss in the drive

input power.
Check for wiring errors in the main circuit drive input power.
Correct the wiring.
There is loose wiring in the drive

input power terminals.
Ensure the terminals are tightened properly.

Refer to Wire Gauges and Tightening Torques on page 46 for details.
Check the voltage from the drive input power.

There is excessive fluctuation in the Review the possible solutions for stabilizing the drive input power.
Disable Input Phase Loss Detection (L8-05 = 0). PF is detected if DC bus
drive input power voltage.
ripple is too high. If it is disabled, there is no fault but the ripple is still too
high, thereby the capacitors are stressed more and lose lifetime.
There is poor balance between
voltage phases.
138
Stabilize drive input power or disable phase loss detection.
5.4 Fault Detection

Fault Name
Check the maintenance time for the capacitors (U4-05).
Replace the drive if U4-05 is greater than 90%.
The main circuit capacitors are

worn.
Check for anything wrong with the drive input power.

If nothing is wrong with the drive input power, try the following solutions if
the alarm continues:
Set L8-05 to 0 to disable Input Phase Loss Protection selection. PF is detected
when DC bus ripple is too high. If it is disabled, there is no fault but the ripple
is still too high, the capacitors are stressed more and lose lifetime.
Replace the drive.
Fault Name
Braking Resistor Overheat
rH
Braking resistor protection was triggered.

Fault detection is enabled when L8-01 = 1 (disabled as a default).
Cause
Possible Solution
Check the load, deceleration time and speed.
Reduce the load.
Increase the acceleration and deceleration times (C1-01 through C1-04).
Replace the braking option with a larger device that can handle the power that
is discharged.
Excessive braking inertia.
Recalculate braking load and braking power. Then try reducing the braking load
and checking the braking resistor settings and improve braking capacity.
The proper braking resistor has not Check the specifications and conditions for the braking resistor device.
been installed.
Select the optimal braking resistor.
Note: The magnitude of the braking load trips the braking resistor overheat alarm, NOT the surface temperature. Using
the braking resistor more frequently than its rating trips the alarm even when the braking resistor surface is not very
hot.
Fault Name
DC Bus Undervoltage
Uv1
Cause
Input power phase loss.
One of the following conditions occurred while the drive was in operation:
Voltage in the DC bus fell below the undervoltage detection level.
For 200 V class: approximately 190 V (160 V for single phase drives)
For 400 V class: approximately 380 V (350 V when E1-01 is less than 400)
The fault is output only if L2-01 = 0 or L2-01 = 1 and the DC bus voltage is
under L2-05 for longer than L2-02.
Possible Solution
The main circuit drive input power is wired incorrectly.
Correct the wiring.
Ensure there are no loose terminals.

One of the drive input power wiring
terminals is loose.
Refer to Wire Gauges and Tightening Torques on page 46 for details.
139
Troubleshooting
Deceleration time is too short and

excessive regenerative energy is
flowing back into the drive.
5.4 Fault Detection

Fault Name
There is a problem with the voltage Check the voltage.

from the drive input power.
Correct the voltage to within range listed in drive input power specifications.
The power has been interrupted.
Correct the drive input power.
Drive internal circuitry has become Check the maintenance time for the capacitors (U4-05).
worn.
Replace the drive if U4-05 exceeds 90%.
The drive input power transformer
is not large enough and voltage
Check the capacity of the drive input power transformer.
drops after switching on power.
Air inside the drive is too hot.
Check the drive internal temperature.
Problem with the CHARGE

indicator.
Replace the drive.

Uv3
Fault Name
Undervoltage 3 (Inrush Prevention Circuit Fault)
The inrush prevention circuit has failed.
Cause
The contactor on the inrush
prevention circuit is damaged.
140
Possible Solution
Cycle power to the drive. Check if the fault reoccurs.

Replace the drive if the fault continues to occur.
Check monitor U4-06 for the performance life of the inrush prevention circuit.
5.5 Alarm Detection
5.5
Alarm Detection
Alarms are drive protection functions that do not operate the fault contact. The drive will
return to original status when the cause of the alarm has been removed.
During an alarm condition, the Digital Operator display flashes and an alarm output is
generated at the multi-function output (H2-01), if programmed.
Investigate the cause of the alarm and refer to Table 5.8 for the appropriate action.
u Alarm Codes, Causes, and Possible Solutions

Table 5.8 Detailed Alarm Codes, Causes, and Possible Solutions
Cause
Drive output interrupted as indicated by an external baseblock signal.

Possible Solution
External baseblock signal entered

via multi-function input terminal
(S1 to S5).
CALL
Cause
Check external sequence and baseblock signal input timing.
Minor Fault
(H2- =
10)
No output
Minor Fault Name

Serial Communication Transmission Error
Communication has not yet been established.
Possible Solution
Minor Fault
(H2- =
10)
Communications wiring is faulty, Check for wiring errors.

there is a short circuit, or something Correct the wiring.
is not connected properly.
Remove and ground shorts and reconnect loose wires.
Programming error on the master
side.
Check communications at start-up and correct programming errors.
Communications circuitry is
damaged.
Perform a self-diagnostics check.

Replace the drive if the fault continues to occurs.
Terminal resistance setting is

incorrect.
The terminal slave drive must have the internal terminal resistance
switch set correctly. Place DIP switch S2 to the ON position.

CE
5
YES
Minor Fault Name

Control data was not received correctly for two seconds.
Troubleshooting
bb
Minor Fault Name

Baseblock
141
5.5 Alarm Detection

Minor Fault Name
Cause
Possible Solution
Minor Fault
(H2- =
10)
Check options available to minimize the effects of noise.

Counteract noise in the control circuit wiring, main circuit lines
and ground wiring.
Reduce noise on the controller side.
Use surge absorbers on magnetic contactors or other equipment
causing the disturbance.
A data error occurred due to noise.
Use cables recommended by Yaskawa or another type of shielded
line. The shield should be grounded on the controller side or on
the drive input power side.
Separate all wiring for communications devices from drive input
power lines. Install an EMC noise filter to the input side of the
drive input power.
Check the H5 parameter settings as well as the protocol setting in
the controller.
Ensure settings are compatible.
Communication protocol is
incompatible.
YES
The CE detection time (H5-09) is Check the PLC.

set shorter than the time required for Change the software settings in the PLC.
a communication cycle to take
Set a longer CE detection time (H5-09).
place.
Incompatible PLC software
settings or there is a hardware
problem.
Check the PLC.

Remove the cause of the error on the controller side.
Communications cable is
disconnected or damaged.
Check the connector for a signal through the cable.

Replace the communications cable.
Minor Fault Name
CrST
Can Not Reset
Cause
Possible Solution
Fault reset was being executed

when a Run command was entered.
Ensure that a run command cannot be entered from the external

terminals or option card during fault reset.
Turn off the Run command.

EF
Cause
142
Minor Fault
(H2- =
10)
YES
Minor Fault Name

Forward/Reverse Run Command Input Error
Both forward run and reverse run closed simultaneously for longer than 0.5 s.
Possible Solution
Minor Fault
(H2- =
10)
5.5 Alarm Detection

Minor Fault Name

Check the forward and reverse command sequence and correct the
problem.
Note: Motor ramps to stop when minor fault EF is detected.

EF1
EF2
EF3
EF4
EF5
Minor Fault Name

External fault (input terminal S1)
Cause
Possible Solution
An external device has tripped an

alarm function.
Remove the cause of the external fault and reset the multi-function
input value.
Wiring is incorrect.
Ensure the signal lines have been connected properly to the

terminals assigned for external fault detection (H1- = 20 to 2F).
Reconnect the signal line.
Multi-function contact inputs are

set incorrectly.
Check if the unused terminals have been set for H1- = 20 to 2F

(External Fault).
Change the terminal settings.

oH
Cause
YES
Minor
Fault
(H2- =
10)
YES
Minor Fault Name
Heatsink Overheat
The temperature exceeded the value set to L8-02.
Possible Solution
Troubleshooting
Sequence error
Minor
Fault
(H2- =
10)
143
5.5 Alarm Detection

Minor Fault Name
Surrounding temperature is too

high
Check the surrounding temperature.

Improve the air circulation within the enclosure panel.
Install a fan or air conditioner to cool surrounding area.
Remove anything near drive that may cause extra heat.
Internal cooling fan has stopped.
Replace the cooling fan.

After replacing the fan, reset the cooling fan maintenance
parameter to (o4-03 = 0).
YES
Provide proper installation space around the drive as indicated in

the manual. Refer to on page 30.
Allow for the specified space and ensure that there is sufficient
circulation around the control panel.
Airflow around the drive is

restricted.
Check for dust or foreign materials clogging cooling fan.

Clear debris caught in the fan that restricts air circulation.
Minor Fault Name

Overtorque 1
oL3
Drive output current was greater than L6-02 for longer than the time set in L6-03.
Cause
Possible Solution
Inappropriate parameter settings.
Minor
Fault
(H2- =
10)
Check parameters L6-02 and L6-03.
There is a fault on the machine side Check the status of the machine.
(e.g., the machine is locked up).
Remove the cause of the fault.
YES
Minor Fault Name

DC Bus Overvoltage
ov
Cause
144
The DC bus voltage exceeded the trip point.

For 200 V class: approximately 410 V
For 400 V class: approximately 820 V (740 V when E1-01 < 400)
Possible Solution
Minor
Fault
(H2- =
10)
5.5 Alarm Detection

Minor Fault Name
Surge voltage present in the drive

input power.
Install an AC reactor or DC link choke.

Voltage surge can result from a thyristor convertor and a phase
advancing capacitor operating on the same drive input power
system.
The motor is short-circuited.

Ground current has
over-charged the main circuit
capacitors via the drive input
power.
Check the motor power cable, relay terminals and motor terminal
box for short circuits.
Correct grounding shorts and turn the power back on.
YES
Review possible solutions for handling noise interference.

Review section on handling noise interference and check control
circuit lines, main circuit lines and ground wiring.
Noise interference causes the drive
to operate incorrectly.
If the magnetic contactor is identified as a source of noise, install
a surge protector to the MC coil.
Set number of fault restarts (L5-01) to a value other than 0.
Minor Fault Name

MEMOBUS/Modbus Comm. Test Mode Complete
Cause
Possible Solution
MEMOBUS/Modbus test has

finished normally.
This verifies that the test was successful.

SE
Minor
Fault
(H2- =
10)
No output
Minor Fault Name

MEMOBUS/Modbus Communication Test Mode Error
Cause
Possible Solution
Minor
Fault
(H2- =
10)
Minor Fault Name

Undervoltage
Uv
Cause
One of the following conditions was true when the drive was stopped and a run
command was entered:
DC bus voltage dropped below the undervoltage detection level.
Contactor to suppress inrush current in the drive was open.
Low voltage in the control drive input power. This alarm outputs only if L2-01
is not 0 and DC bus voltage is below the detection level.
Possible Solution
Minor
Fault
(H2- =
10)
145
Troubleshooting
PASS
5.5 Alarm Detection

Minor Fault Name
Check for wiring errors in the main circuit drive input power. Correct
Phase loss in the drive input power. the
wiring.
Loose wiring in the drive input
power terminals.
Ensure the terminals have been properly tightened.

Apply the tightening torque specified in this manual to fasten the
terminals. Refer to Wire Gauges and Tightening Torques on page
46.
There is a problem with the drive

input power voltage.
Check the voltage.

Lower the voltage of the drive input power so that it is within the
limits listed in the specifications.
Drive internal circuitry is worn.
Check the maintenance time for the capacitors (U4-05).

YES
The drive input power transformer Check for a tripped alarm when the magnetic contactor, line
is not large enough and voltage
breaker and leakage breaker are turned on.
drops when the power is switched
Check the capacity of the drive input power transformer.
on.
Air inside the drive is too hot.
Check the temperature inside the drive.
The CHARGE indicator light is

broken or disconnected.
Replace the drive.
146
5.6 Operator Programming Errors
5.6
Operator Programming Errors
An Operator Programming Error (oPE) occurs when an inappropriate parameter is set or an

individual parameter setting is inappropriate.
The drive will not operate until the parameter is set correctly; however, no alarm or fault
outputs will occur. If an oPE occurs, investigate the cause and Refer to Detailed oPE Codes,
Causes, and Possible Solutions on page 147 for the appropriate action.
u oPE Codes, Causes, and Possible Solutions

Table 5.9 Detailed oPE Codes, Causes, and Possible Solutions
oPE01
Error Name
Drive Capacity Setting Fault
Drive capacity and the value set to o2-04 do not match.
Cause
Possible Solution
The drive capacity setting (o2-04)

and the actual capacity of the drive Correct the value set to o2-04.
are not the same.
Cause
Fault Name
Parameter Range Setting Error
Troubleshooting
oPE02
Possible Solution
Parameters were set outside the

possible setting range.
Set parameters to the proper values.
Note: Other errors are given precedence over oPE02 when multiple errors occur at the same time.
Fault Name
Multi-Function Input Selection Error
oPE03
Cause
A contradictory setting is assigned to multi-function contact inputs H1-01 to

H1-05.
Possible Solution
The same function is assigned to

Ensure all multi-function inputs are assigned to different functions.
two multi-function inputs.
Re-enter the multi-function settings to ensure this does not occur.
Excludes Not used and
External Fault.
The Up command was set but
the Down command was not, or
vice versa (settings 10 vs. 11).
Correctly set functions that need to be enabled in combination with other
Run command for a 2-Wire
functions.
sequence was set, but forward/
reverse command for a 2-Wire
sequence was not.
147
5.6 Operator Programming Errors

Fault Name
The following two functions are set

at the same time:
Up/Down Command (10 vs.
11)
Hold Accel/Decel Stop (A)
Check if contradictory settings have been assigned to the multi-function input
One of the following settings is set
terminals at the same time.
at the multi-function input
Correct setting errors.
terminals:
External Search Command 1
and External Search Command
2 (61 vs. 62)
Fast-Stop N.O. and Fast-Stop
N.C. (15 vs. 17)
Fault Name
oPE05
Run Command/Frequency Reference Source Selection Error
Cause
Possible Solution
Frequency reference is assigned to

an option unit (b1-01 = 2 or 3) that
is not connected to the drive.
The Run command is assigned to
serial communication (b1-02 = 2)
but no communication option is
connected to the drive.
Reconnect the option card to the drive.
Fault Name
V/f Data Setting Error
oPE10
One or more of the parameters listed below are not set according to the formula:
E1-09 E1-07 < E1-06 E1-04
Cause
Possible Solution
Fault Name
Carrier Frequency Setting Error
oPE11
Correct the setting for the carrier frequency.
Cause
Possible Solution
The following simultaneous

contradictory settings: C6-05 is
greater than 6 and C6-04 is greater
than C6-03 (carrier frequency
lower limit is greater than the upper
limit). If C6-05 is less than or equal Correct the parameter settings.
to 6, the drive operates at C6-03.
Upper and lower limits between
C6-02 and C6-05 contradict each
other.
148
5.7 Diagnosing and Resetting Faults
5.7
Diagnosing and Resetting Faults
When a fault occurs and the drive stops, follow the instructions below to remove whatever
conditions triggered the fault, then restart the drive.
u Fault Occurs Simultaneously with Power Loss

WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Ensure there are no short circuits between the main circuit terminals
(R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3) or between the ground and main circuit terminals before restarting the drive. Failure
to comply may result in serious injury or death and will cause damage to equipment.
1.
2.
Note:
Turn on the drive input power.

Remove the cause of the fault and reset.
1
.
2
.
To find out what faults were triggered, Check U2-02 (Fault History) to determine the faults
that have been triggered.
If the fault continues to be displayed after cycling power, remove the cause of the fault and
reset.
u If the Drive Still has Power After a Fault Occurs

Look at the LED operator for information on the fault that occurred.
Refer to Fault Displays, Causes, and Possible Solutions on page 130.
Reset the fault. Refer to Fault Reset Methods on page 150.
Troubleshooting
1.
2.
3.
u Viewing Fault History Data After Fault

Step
Display/Result
1. Turn on the drive input power. The first screen displays.
STOP
2.
3.
4.
5.
Press
Press
Press
Press
until the monitor screen is displayed.

to display the parameter setting screen.
and > until U2-02 (Fault History) is displayed.
to view previous fault (here, EF3).
149
5.7 Diagnosing and Resetting Faults
u Fault Reset Methods

After the Fault Occurs
Procedure
Fix the cause of the fault,

restart the drive, and reset the
Press
fault
on the digital operator.

STOP
Drive
Fix the cause of the fault and Close then open the fault signal digital
reset via Fault Reset Digital input via terminal S4. S4 is set fault
Input S4.
reset as default (H1-04 = 12)
Fault Reset Switch
S4 Fault Reset Digital Input

SC Digital Input Common
ON
OFF
If the above methods do not reset the fault, turn off the drive main
power supply. Reapply power after LED operator display is out.
150
5.8 Troubleshooting without Fault Display
5.8
Troubleshooting without Fault Display
This section describes troubleshooting problems that do not trip an alarm or fault.
u Cannot Change Parameter Settings

Cause
Possible Solutions
The drive is running the motor (i.e., the

Run command is present).
Stop the drive and switch over to the Programming Mode.

Most parameters cannot be edited during run.
The Access Level is set to restrict access

to parameter settings.
Set the Access Level to allow parameters to be edited (A1-01 = 2).
The operator is not in the Parameter Setup See what mode the LED parameter is current set for.
Mode (the LED screen will display
Parameters cannot be edited when in the Setup Mode (STUP). Switch
PAr).
modes so that PAr appears on the screen.
at the same time. Parameter A1-05 will appear.

Set a new password to parameter A1-05.
Undervoltage was detected.
Check the drive input power voltage by looking at the DC bus voltage
(U1-07).
Check all main circuit wiring.
Troubleshooting
The wrong password was entered.
If the password entered to A1-04 does not match the password saved to
A1-05, then drive settings cannot be changed.
Reset the password.
If you cannot remember the password:
STOP
Display parameter A1-04. Press the
button while pressing
151
u Motor Does Not Rotate Properly after Pressing RUN Button

or after Entering External Run Command
n Motor Does Not Rotate

Cause
Possible Solutions
The drive is not in the Drive Mode.
The
button was pushed.
Check if the DRV light on the LED operator is lit.

Enter the Drive Mode to begin operating the motor. Refer to The Drive
and Programming Modes on page 79.
Stop the drive and check if the correct frequency reference source is selected.
If the operator keypad shall be the source, the LO/RE button LED must be
on, if the source is REMOTE, it must be off.
Take the following step to solve the problem:
Push the
button.
A Fast-Stop was executed and has not yet Reset the Fast-Stop command.
been reset.
Check parameter b1-02 (Run Command Selection).
b1-02 so that it corresponds with the correct run command source.
Settings are incorrect for the source that Set
0: LED operator
provides the run command.
1: Control circuit terminal (default setting)
2: MEMOBUS/Modbus communications
There is faulty wiring in the control
circuit terminals.
Check the wiring for the control terminal.

Correct wiring mistakes.
Check the input terminal status monitor (U1-10).
The drive has been set to accept the

frequency reference from the incorrect
source.
Check parameter b1-01 (Frequency Reference Selection 1).

Set b1-01 to the correct source of the frequency reference.
0: LED operator
1: Control circuit terminal (default setting)
2: MEMOBUS/Modbus communications
3: Potentiometer (option)
The terminal set to accept the main speed Check DIP switch S1. Next assign the correct input level to terminal A1
reference is set to the incorrect voltage (H3-01).
and/or current.
Refer to DIP Switch S1 Analog Input Signal Selection on page 62.
Selection for the sink/source mode is
incorrect.
Check DIP switch S3. Refer to Sinking/Sourcing Mode Switch on page

59.
Frequency reference is too low.
Check the frequency reference monitor (U1-01).

Increase the frequency by changing the maximum output frequency
(E1-09).
Multi-function analog input is set up to Check the multi-function analog input settings.
accept gain for the frequency reference, Check if H3-02 has been set to the proper values.
but no voltage (current) has been
Check if the analog input value has been set properly.
provided.
152

Cause
Possible Solutions
STOP
When the
button is pressed, the drive will decelerate to stop.
STOP
button was pressed when Switch off the run command and then re-enter a run command.
The
the drive was started from a REMOTE
source.
STOP
The
button is disabled when o2-02 is set to 0.
Motor is not producing enough torque.
Ensure the selected V/f pattern corresponds with the characteristics of

the motor being used.
Increase both the minimum and mid output frequency voltages (E1-08,
E1-10).
Increase the frequency reference so that it is higher than the minimum
frequency reference (E1-09).
Increase the torque compensation gain (C4-01).
The drive is set for both 2-Wire and

3-Wire sequence at the same time.
The drive is set for a 3-Wire sequence when one of the parameters H1-03
through H1-05 is set to 0.
If the drive is supposed to be set up for a 2-Wire sequence, then ensure
parameters H1-03 through H1-05 are not set to 0.
If the drive is supposed to be set up for a 3-Wire sequence, then H1 must be set to 0.
n Motor Rotates in the Opposite Direction from the Run Command
Phase wiring between the drive and

motor is incorrect.
Possible Solutions
Check the motor wiring.
Switch two motor cables (U, V, and W) to reverse motor direction.
Connect drive output terminals U/T1, V/T2 and W/T3 in the right order
to the corresponding motor terminals U, V, and W.
Change the setting of parameter b1-14.
Typically, forward is designated as being counterclockwise when looking
from the motor shaft (refer to the figure below).
The forward direction for the motor is

setup incorrectly.
2
1. Forward Rotating Motor (looking down the motor shaft)
2. Motor Shaft
Note:
Troubleshooting
Cause
Check the motor specifications for the forward and reverse directions. The motor specifications will vary
depending on the manufacturer of the motor.
153
n Motor is Too Hot

Cause
Possible Solutions
If the load is too heavy for the motor, the motor will overheat as it exceeds
its rated torque value for an extended period of time.
Keep in mind that the motor also has a short-term overload rating in
addition to the possible solutions provided below:
Reduce the load.
Increase the acceleration and deceleration times.
Check the values set for the motor protection (L1-01, L1-02) as well as
the motor rated current (E2-01).
Increase motor capacity.
The air around the motor is too hot.
Check the ambient temperature.

Cool the area until it is within the specified temperature range.
Insufficient voltage insulation between

motor phases.
When the motor is connected to terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3, voltage
surges occur between the motor coils and drive switching.
Normally, surges can reach up to three times the drive input power supply
voltage (600 V for 200 V class, and 1200 V for 400 V class).
Use a motor with voltage tolerance higher than the max voltage surge.
Use a motor designed to work specifically with a drive when using a
400 V class unit.
Install an AC reactor on the output side of the drive.
The motor fan has stopped or is clogged.
Check the motor fan.
n oPE02 Error Occurs when Lowering the Motor Rated Current

Setting
Cause
Possible Solutions
The user is trying to set the motor rated current in E2-01 to a value lower
than the no-load current set in E2-03.
The motor rated current and the motor no- Make
sure that value set in E2-01 is higher than E2-03. Setting E2-01 <
load current settings in the drive are
E2-03 will trigger an oPE02 error.
incorrect.
If it is necessary to set E2-01 lower than E2-03, first lower the value set
to E2-03, then change the setting in E2-01 as needed.
n Motor Stalls During Acceleration or With Large Loads

Cause
Load is too heavy.
154
Possible Solutions
Take the following steps to resolve the problem:
Reduce the load.
Increase the acceleration time.
Increase motor capacity.
Although the drive has a Stall Prevention function and a Torque
Compensation Limit function, accelerating too quickly or trying to drive
an excessively large load can exceed the capabilities of the motor.
n Motor Will Not Accelerate or the Acceleration Time is Too Long

Cause
Possible Solutions
Check the maximum output frequency (E1-04).
Increase E1-04 if it is set too low.
Frequency reference is too low.
Check U1-01 for proper frequency reference.

Check if a frequency reference signal switch has been set to one of the multifunction input terminals.
Check for low gain level set to terminal A1 (H3-03).
Load is too heavy.
Reduce the load so that the output current remains within the motor-rated
current.
In extruder and mixer applications, the load will sometimes increase as
the temperature drops.
Check if the mechanical brake is fully releasing as it should.
Acceleration time has been set too long.
Check if the acceleration time parameters have been set too long (C1-01,
-03).
Motor characteristics and drive parameter Set the correct V/f pattern so that it matches the characteristics of the
motor being used.
settings are incompatible with one
another in V/f Control.
Check the motor data and adjust V/f pattern settings.
Check the multi-function analog input settings.
Ensure the analog input value is set to the right value (U1-13).
Check the Stall Prevention level during acceleration (L3-02).

The Stall Prevention level during
acceleration and deceleration set too low. If L3-02 is set too low, acceleration will take a fair amount of time.
Increase L3-02.
Check the Stall Prevention level during run (L3-06).
The Stall Prevention level during run has
If L3-06 is set too low, speed will drop as the drive outputs torque.
been set too low.
Increase the setting value.
n Drive Frequency Reference Differs from the Controller Frequency

Reference Command
Cause
Possible Solutions
The analog input frequency gain and bias Check the frequency reference terminal input gain level assigned to terminal
are set to incorrect values.
A1 (parameter H3-03).
n Poor Speed Control Accuracy

Cause
Slip compensation function disabled or
set up incorrectly.
Possible Solutions
Adjust the slip compensation gain (C3-01).
Troubleshooting
Incorrect frequency reference setting.
155
n Deceleration Takes Longer Than Expected when Using a Braking

Resistor
Cause
Possible Solutions
L3-04 is set incorrectly.
Check the Stall Prevention Level during deceleration (L3-04).

If a braking resistor option has been installed, disable Stall Prevention
during deceleration (L3-04 = 0).
The deceleration time is set too long.
Set deceleration to more appropriate time (C1-02 and C1-04).
Insufficient motor torque.
Assuming parameter settings are normal and that no overvoltage occurs

when there is insufficient torque, it is likely that the demand on the motor
has exceeded the motor capacity.
Use a larger motor.
Load exceeded the internal torque limit

determined by the drive rated current.
Switch to a larger capacity drive.
n Motor Hunting Occurs When Operating With a Light Load

Cause
Possible Solutions
Carrier frequency is too high.
Lower the carrier frequency setting C6-02.
Large V/f setting value at low speeds

triggers overexcitation.
Use parameters E1-04 through E1-10 to set the V/f pattern in relation to
the load characteristics.
The maximum output frequency and the Set the proper values for the maximum output frequency and base frequency
base frequency reference are not set
(E1-04, E1-06).
properly in relationship to each other.
Hunting Prevention is set up incorrectly. Adjust the hunting prevention gain (n1-02).
n Noise From Drive or Output Lines When the Drive is Powered On

Cause
Possible Solutions
Relay switching in the drive generates

excessive noise.

Install a noise filter on the input side of drive input power.
Install a noise filter on the output side of the drive.
Place the wiring inside a metal conduit to shield it from switching noise.
Ground the drive and motor properly.
Separate the main circuit wiring and the control lines.
n Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI) Trips During Run

Cause
Possible Solutions
Excessive leakage current trips MCCB.
156
Increase the GFCI sensitivity or use GFCI with a higher threshold.

Reduce the length of the cable used between the drive and the motor.
Install a noise filter or reactor on the output side of the drive.
n Connected Machinery Vibrates When Motor Rotates

Excessive Motor Oscillation and Erratic Rotation
Cause
Poor balance between motor phases.
Possible Solutions
Check drive input power voltage to ensure that it provides stable power.
Unexpected Noise from Connected Machinery

Cause
The carrier frequency is at the resonant
frequency of the connected machinery.
Possible Solutions
Adjust the carrier frequency using parameters C6-02 through C6-05.
The drive output frequency is the same as Adjust the parameters used for the Jump Frequency function (d3-01
through d3-04) to skip the problem-causing bandwidth.
the resonant frequency of the connected
machinery.
Place the motor on a rubber pad to reduce vibration.
Note:
The drive may have trouble assessing the status of the load due to white noise generated when using
Swing PWM (C6-02 = 7).
n Oscillation or Hunting
Cause
Insufficient tuning.
Possible Solutions
Adjust Hunting prevention Gain Setting (n1-02).
Troubleshooting
Ensure that noise is not affecting the signal lines.

The frequency reference is assigned to an Separate main circuit wiring and control circuit wiring.
external source and the signal is noisy.
Use twisted-pair cables or shielded wiring for the control circuit.
Increase the analog input time filter constant (H3-13).
The cable between the drive and motor is Reduce the length of the cable.
too long.
n Motor Rotates After the Drive Output is Shut Off

Cause
Possible Solutions
Adjust the DC Injection braking settings.

Low DC Injection Braking and the drive
Increase the value of b2-02 (DC Injection Braking Current).
cannot decelerate properly.
Increase the b2-04 (DC Injection Braking Time at Stop).
n ov or Speed Loss Occurs When Starting into a Rotating Load

Cause
Possible Solutions
Stop the motor using DC Injection braking. Restart the motor.

The load is already rotating when the drive Increase the value of b2-03 (DC Injection Braking Time at start).
is trying to start it.
Set a multi-function input terminal for external Speed Search command
(H1-=61 or 62 during restart).
157
n Output Frequency is not as High as Frequency Reference

Cause
Possible Solutions
Frequency reference is set within the

range of the Jump Frequency.
Adjust the parameters used for the Jump Frequency function (d3-01,
d3-02).
Enabling the Jump Frequency prevents the drive from outputting the
frequencies specified in the Jump Frequency range.
Upper limit for the frequency reference

has been exceeded.
Set the maximum output frequency and the upper limit for the frequency
reference to more appropriate values (E1-04, d2-01).
The following calculation yields the upper value for the output
frequency = E1-04 x d2-01 / 100
Large load triggered Stall Prevention

function during acceleration.
Reduce the load.

Adjust the Stall Prevention level during acceleration (L3-02).
n Buzzing Sound from Motor at 2 kHz

Cause
Possible Solutions
If the output current rises too high at low speeds, the carrier frequency
automatically reduces and causes a whining or buzzing sound.
Exceeded 110% of the rated output
If the sound is coming from the motor, disable carrier frequency derating
current of the drive while operating at low
(L8-38 = 0).
speeds.
Disabling the automatic carrier frequency derating increases the chances
of an overload fault (oL2). Switch to a larger capacity motor if oL2 faults
occur too frequently.
n Motor Does Not Operate When the RUN Button on the Digital
Operator is Pressed
Cause
Possible Solutions
The LOCAL/REMOTE mode is not

selected properly.
Press the LOCAL/REMOTE button to switch. The LO/RE LED should be

on for LOCAL mode.
The drive is not in drive mode.
A run command will not be issued. Exit to the drive mode and cycle the run
command.
The frequency reference is too low.
If the frequency reference is set below the frequency set in E1-09

(Minimum Output Frequency), the drive will not operate.
Raise the frequency reference to at least the minimum output frequency.
n Motor Does Not Operate When an External Run Command is Input

Cause
Possible Solutions
The LOCAL/REMOTE mode is not

selected properly.
Press the LOCAL/REMOTE button to switch. The LO/RE LED should be

off for REMOTE mode.
The drive is not in Drive Mode.
A run command will not be issued. Exit to the Drive mode and cycle the
run command.
158

Cause
The frequency reference is too low.
Possible Solutions
If the frequency reference is set below the frequency set in E1-09
(Minimum Output Frequency), the drive will not operate.
Raise the frequency reference to at least the minimum output frequency.
n Motor Stops During Acceleration or When a Load is Connected

Cause
Possible Solution

The limit of motor response may be
reached during rapid acceleration. This Increase the acceleration time (C1-01) or reduce the motor load. Also,
consider increasing the motor size and/or drive size.
may be a result of improper stall
prevention or automatic torque boost
function adjustment.
n Motor Rotates in One Direction Only

Cause
Possible Solutions
"Reverse run prohibited" is selected. If

b1-04 (Reverse Prohibit Operation) is set
to 1 (reverse run prohibited), the drive will Set b1-04 = 0 to allow reverse run operation.
not accept a reverse run command.
Check parameter b1-04.
Set the drive to allow the motor to rotate in reverse (b1-04 = 0).
A Reverse run signal has not been entered, Make sure that one of the input terminals S3 to S5 used for the 3-Wire
although 3-Wire sequence is selected.
sequence has been set for reverse.
n Peripheral Devices Affected by Drive Operation

Cause
Radio frequency interference may be

generated by drive output PWM
waveform.
Possible Solutions
Change the Carrier Frequency Selection (C6-02) to lower the carrier
frequency. This will help to reduce the amount of transistor switching
noise.
Install an Input Noise Filter at the input power terminals.
Install an Output Noise Filter at the motor terminals.
Use conduit. Metal can shield electrical noise.
Ground the drive and motor.
Separate main circuit wiring from control wiring.
159
Troubleshooting
The drive prohibits reverse rotation.
n Ground Fault Interrupter Activates When Drive is Running

Cause
Possible Solutions
Change to a ground fault interrupter with a higher leakage current

detection level (such as, a sensitivity current of 200 mA or greater per
The output of the drive is a series of high
Unit, with an operating time of 0.1 s or more), or one that incorporates
frequency pulses (PWM), so there is a
high-frequency corrective actions.
certain amount of leakage current. This
may cause the ground fault interrupter to Change the Carrier Frequency Selection (C6-02) to lower the carrier
operate and cut off the drive input power.
frequency.
Note: Leakage current increases in proportion to cable length.
160
6
Periodic
Inspection &
Maintenance
This chapter describes the periodic inspection and maintenance
of the drive to ensure that it receives the proper care to maintain
overall performance.
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
SECTION SAFETY...........................................162
INSPECTION...................................................165
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE..............................168
DRIVE COOLING FANS...................................171
161
6.1 Section Safety
6.1
Section Safety
DANGER

WARNING
motor case.
personnel familiar with installation, adjustment, and maintenance of AC drives.
protection.
162
6.1 Section Safety
WARNING
safe level.

Maintenance
Fire Hazard
163
6.1 Section Safety
NOTICE
circuit boards.
voltage.
Use shielded, twisted-pair wires and ground the shield to the ground terminal of the drive.
to the drive.
164
6.2 Inspection
6.2
Inspection
Power electronics have limited life and may exhibit changed characteristics or performance
deterioration after years of use under normal conditions. To help avoid such problems, it is
important to perform preventive maintenance and periodic inspection on the drive.
Drives contain a variety of power electronics such as power transistors, semiconductors,
capacitors, resistors, fans, and relays. The electronics in the drive serve a critical role in
maintaining proper motor control.
Follow the inspection lists provided in this chapter as a part of a regular maintenance program.
u Recommended Daily Inspection

Table 6.1 outlines the recommended daily inspection for Yaskawa drives. Check the following
items on a daily basis to avoid premature deterioration in performance or product failure. Copy
this checklist and mark the Checked column after each inspection.
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Do not connect or disconnect wiring while the power is on. Failure to
comply can result in serious personal injury. Before servicing the drive, disconnect all power to the equipment.
The internal capacitor remains charged even after the power supply is turned off. The charge indicator LED
will extinguish when the DC bus voltage is below 50 Vdc. To prevent electric shock, wait at least one minute
Table 6.1 General Recommended Daily Inspection Checklist
Inspection
Category
Inspection Points
Corrective Action
Motor
Inspect for abnormal oscillation or

noise coming from the motor.
Check the load coupling.

Measure motor vibration.
Tighten all loose components.
Cooling
Inspect for abnormal heat generated

from the drive or motor and visible
discoloration.
Checked
Check for excessive load.

Loose connections
Check for dirty heatsink or motor.
Ambient temperature
165

Maintenance
Note: The drive will require more frequent inspection if it is placed in harsh environments,
such as:
High ambient temperatures
Frequent starting and stopping
Fluctuations in the AC supply or load
Excessive vibrations or shock loading
Dust, metal dust, salt, sulfuric acid, chlorine atmospheres
Poor storage conditions.
Perform the first equipment inspection 3 months after installation.
6.2 Inspection
Inspection
Category
Inspection Points
Corrective Action
Checked
Check for clogged or dirty fan.

Check fan operation drive parameter.
Cooling Fan
Inspect drive cooling fan operation.
Environment
Verify the drive environment complies Eliminate

the source of contaminants
with the specifications listed in the
or correct poor environment.
Installation section of this manual.
Load
The drive output current should not be Check for excessive load.
higher than the motor or drive rating for Check the motor parameter settings
an extended period of time.
of the drive.
Power Supply
Voltage
Check main power supply and control

voltages.
Correct the voltage or power supply

to within nameplate specifications.
Verify all main circuit phases.
u Recommended Periodic Inspection

Table 6.2 outlines the recommended periodic inspections for Yaskawa drive installations.
Periodic inspections should generally be checked every 3-6 months; however, the drive may
require more frequent inspection due to poor environments or rigorous use. Operating and
environmental conditions, along with experience in each application, will determine the actual
inspection frequency for each installation. Periodic inspection will help to avoid premature
deterioration in performance or product failure. Copy this checklist and mark the Checked
column after each inspection.
n Periodic Inspection
Table 6.2 Periodic Inspection Checklist
Inspection
Area
Inspection Points
Corrective Action
Checked
Main Circuit Periodic Inspection

Replace damaged components as
required.
Inspect equipment for discoloration
from overheating or deterioration.
The drive has few serviceable parts
and may require complete drive
Inspect for damaged or deformed parts.
replacement.
General
166
Inspect enclosure door seal if

present. Replace components if
cleaning is not possible.
Inspect for dirt, foreign particles, or dust
collection on components.
Remove foreign particles and dust
with a vacuum cleaner to avoid
touching parts.
6.2 Inspection
Inspection
Area
Inspection Points
Inspect wiring and connections for

discoloration, damage, or heat stress.
Conductors and
Wiring
Inspect wire insulation and shielding
for wear.
Corrective Action
Checked
Repair or replace damaged wiring.
Terminals
Inspect terminals for stripped,

damaged, or loose connections.
Tighten loose screws and replace

damaged screws or terminals.
Relays and
Contactors
Inspect contactors and relays for

excessive noise during operation.
Inspect coils for signs of overheating
such as melted or cracked insulation.
Check coil voltage for over or under

voltage conditions.
Replace damaged removable relays
contactors or circuit board.
Braking
Resistors
Inspect for discoloration of heat stress

on or around resistors.
Minor discoloration may be

acceptable.
If discoloration exists check for
loose connections.
Control Circuit Periodic Inspection
General
Tighten loose screws and replace

Inspect terminals for stripped, damaged
damaged screws or terminals.
or loose connections.
If terminals are integral to a circuit
board then board or drive
Check for tightness.
replacement may be required.
LEDs
Make sure the LED lights correctly.

Inspect for dust or other foreign
material that may have collected on
surrounding components.
Cooling Fan
Check for abnormal oscillation or

unusual noise.
Check for damaged or missing fan
blades.
Replace as required.
Refer to Drive Cooling Fans on
page 171 for information on
cleaning or replacing the cooling fan.
Heatsink
Inspect for dust or other foreign

material collected on the surface.
Remove foreign particles and dust

with a vacuum cleaner to avoid
touching parts.
Air Duct
Inspect air intake and exhaust openings. Visually inspect the area.
They must be free from obstruction and Clear obstructions and clean air duct
properly installed.
as required.
Operation
Check
Check for increased vibration or

abnormal noise.
LED Periodic Inspection

Maintenance
Contact your Yaskawa

representative if there is any trouble
with the LED or keypad.
Clean the LED.
Cooling System Periodic Inspection
Motor Periodic Inspection
Note:
Stop the motor and contact qualified

maintenance personnel as required.
Periodic inspections should be performed every one or two years. The drive, however, may require more
frequent inspection due to poor environments or rigorous use.
167
6.3 Periodic Maintenance
6.3
Periodic Maintenance
The drive has various "maintenance monitors." This feature provides advance maintenance
warning and eliminates the need to shut down the entire system for unexpected problems. The
drive allows the user to check the following maintenance periods.
Cooling Fan
Electrolytic Capacitors (Main Circuit)
Inrush Prevention Circuit
IGBT
u Replacement Parts
Table 6.3 contains the estimated performance life of components that require replacement
during the life of the drive. Only use Yaskawa replacement parts for the appropriate drive
model and revision.
Table 6.3 Estimated Performance Life
Component
<1>
Estimated Performance Life
Cooling Fan
2 ~ 3 years
Electrolytic Capacitors (Main Circuit)
10 years <1>
The drive has few serviceable parts and may require complete drive replacement.
NOTICE: Estimated performance life based on specific usage conditions. These conditions are provided for
the purpose of replacing parts to maintain performance. Some parts may require more frequent replacement
due to poor environments or rigorous use.
Usage conditions for estimated performance life:
Ambient temperature: Yearly average of 30 C
Load factor: 80% maximum
Operation time: 12 hours a day
n Performance Life Monitors

The drive calculates the maintenance period for components that may require replacement
during the life of the drive. A percentage of the maintenance period is displayed on the LED
digital operator by viewing the appropriate monitor parameter.
When the maintenance period reaches 100%, there is increased risk that the drive may
malfunction. Yaskawa recommends checking the maintenance period regularly to ensure
maximum performance life.
Refer to Recommended Periodic Inspection on page 166 for more details.
168

Table 6.4 Performance Life Monitors Used for Component Replacement
Parameter
Component
Contents
Displays the accumulated cooling fan operation time as a percentage of the
specified maintenance period (displayed in percent %).
U4-04
Cooling Fan
U4-05
Main Circuit (DC bus) Displays the accumulated time the capacitors are used as a percentage of the
Electrolytic Capacitors specified maintenance period.
U4-06
Inrush (pre-charge)
relay
Displays the number of times the drive is powered up as a percentage of the

performance life of the inrush circuit.
U4-07
IGBT
Displays the percentage of the maintenance period reached by the IGBTs.
n Alarm Outputs for Maintenance Monitors

An output can be set up to inform the user when a specific components has neared its expected
performance life.
When one of multi-function digital output terminals has been assigned the maintenance
monitor function (H2- = 2F), the terminal will close when the cooling fan, DC bus
capacitors, or DC bus pre-charge relay reach 90% of the expected performance life, or when
the IGBTs have reached 50% of their expected performance life. Additionally the digital
operator will display an alarm like shown in Table 6.5 to indicate the specific components
that may need maintenance.
Table 6.5 Maintenance Alarms
<1>
Function
Corrective Action
<1>
LT-1
The cooling fans have reached 90% of their Replace the cooling fan.
designated life time.
<1>
LT-2
Contact a Yaskawa
The DC bus capacitors have reached 90% representative or the nearest
of their designated life time.
Yaskawa sales office on
possible drive replacement.
<1>
LT-3
The DC bus charge circuit has reached

90% of its designated life time.
Contact a Yaskawa
representative or the nearest
<1>
LT-4
The IGBTs have reached 50% of their

Check the load, carrier

frequency, and output
frequency.
<2>
TrPC
The IGBTs have reached 90% of their

Contact a Yaskawa
representative or the nearest
This alarm message will be output only if the Maintenance Monitor function is assigned to one of the digital
outputs (H2- = 2F). The alarm will also trigger a digital output that is programmed for alarm indication (H2 = 10).
169

Maintenance
Digital Operator Alarm

Display

<2>
This alarm message will always be output, even if the Maintenance Monitor function is not assigned to any of
the digital outputs (H2- = 2F). The alarm will also trigger a digital output that is programmed for alarm
indication (H2- = 10).
n Related Drive Parameters

Use parameters o4-03, o4-05, o4-07, and o4-09 to reset a Maintenance Monitor to zero after
replacing a specific component. Refer to Parameter List on page 213 for details on parameter
settings.
NOTICE: If these parameters are not reset after the corresponding parts have been replaced, the
Maintenance Monitor function will continue to count down the performance life from the value that was reached
with the old part. If the Maintenance Monitor is not reset, the drive will not have the correct value of the
performance life for the new component.
170
6.4 Drive Cooling Fans
6.4
Drive Cooling Fans
NOTICE: Follow cooling fan replacement instructions. The cooling fan cannot operate properly when installed
incorrectly and could seriously damage the drive. To ensure maximum useful product life, replace all cooling
fans when performing maintenance.
Contact your Yaskawa representative or supplier to order replacement cooling fans as

required.
u Number of Cooling Fans

Drive Model
Cooling Fans
Single-Phase 200 V Class
BA0001
BA0002
BA0003
BA0006
BA0010
2A0001
2A0002
2A0004
2A0006
2A0010
2A0012
2A0020

Maintenance
Three-Phase 200 V Class
1
4A0001
4A0002
4A0004
4A0005
4A0007
4A0009
4A0011
171
u Cooling Fan Replacement

The cooling fan is installed on the top of the drive. The cooling fan can easily be replaced
without tools or removal of the drive or enclosure parts.
CAUTION! Burn Hazard. Do not touch a hot drive heatsink. Failure to comply could result in minor or moderate
injury. Shut off the power to the drive when replacing the cooling fan. To prevent burns, wait at least 15 minutes
and ensure the heatsink has cooled down.
n Removing the Cooling Fan

1.
Depress the right and left sides of the fan cover tabs and pull upward. Remove the
fan cover from the top of the drive. The following figure illustrates a drive with a single
cooling fan.
A
B
172
A Fan cover
B Cooling fan
C Tab
Figure 6.1 Remove the Cooling Fan Cover
Remove the fan cable carefully, disconnect the pluggable connector and remove the
fan.

Maintenance
2.
Figure 6.2 Disconnect and Remove the Fan
173
n Installing the Cooling Fan

NOTICE: Prevent Equipment Damage. Follow cooling fan replacement instructions. Improper cooling fan
replacement could result in damage to equipment. When installing the replacement cooling fan into the drive,
make sure the fan is facing upwards. To ensure maximum useful product life, replace all cooling fans when
performing maintenance.
1.
Install the replacement cooling fan into the drive, ensuring the alignment pins line up,
as shown in the figure below:
C
A Label facing up
B Back
C Front
Figure 6.3 Cooling Fan Orientation
2.
174
Ensure the connectors are properly connected and place the cable back into the
recess of the drive.
A
A Push the connectors together so no space remains between
them.
Figure 6.4 Connectors
Note:
Ensure that the left and right tabs are locked back into place.
Align the left and right cover tabs to install the fan cover back on the top of the drive.

Maintenance
3.
Figure 6.5 Installation
175
176
7
Peripheral Devices
& Options
This chapter explains the installation of available peripheral
devices and options for the drive.
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
SECTION SAFETY...........................................178
DRIVE OPTIONS AND PERIPHERAL DEVICES180
CONNECTING PERIPHERAL DEVICES...........182
INSTALLING PERIPHERAL DEVICES..............184
OPTIONS.........................................................198
177
7.1 Section Safety
7.1
Section Safety
DANGER

Disconnect all power to the drive, wait at least one minute after all indicators are off, measure
the DC bus voltage to confirm safe level, and check for unsafe voltages before servicing to
prevent electric shock. The internal capacitor remains charged even after the power supply
is turned off. The charge indicator LED will extinguish when the DC bus voltage is below
50 Vdc.
WARNING
safe level.
Installation, maintenance, inspection and servicing must be performed only by authorized
178
7.1 Section Safety
WARNING
protection.
Remove all metal objects such as watches and rings, secure loose clothing and wear eye
motor case.
Do not change wiring or remove option unit while power is running through the drive.
Disconnect all power to the drive and check for unsafe voltages before servicing.
circuit boards.
voltage.

Options
NOTICE
179
7.2 Drive Options and Peripheral Devices
7.2
Drive Options and Peripheral Devices
The following table of peripheral devices lists the names of the various devices/options
available for Yaskawa drives. Contact Yaskawa or your Yaskawa agent to order these
peripheral devices.
Peripheral Device Selection: Refer to Yaskawa catalog for selection and part numbers.
Peripheral Device Installation: Refer to option manual for option installation instructions.
Table 7.1 Available Peripheral Devices
Option
Model Number
Description
Power Options
DC Link Choke
UZDA Series
DC link choke to improve power factor
AC Reactor
UZBA Series
AC reactor to improve power factor
Braking Resistor <1>
ERF-150WJ Series
3% ED, 150 W braking resistor
Surge Absorber
200 V class: DCR2A

400 V class:
RFN3AL-504KD
Suppresses surge voltage caused by switching magnetic

contactors
Molded Case Circuit

Breaker
NF Series
Circuit breaker for short circuit or overload protection

Note: Yaskawa recommends installing an MCCB to the power
supply side to protect drive wiring and to prevent other damage in
the event of component failure. Install an MCCB if permitted by
the power system.
Ground Fault Circuit

Interrupter (GFCI)
Provides protection against potentially harmful leakage currents

Note: Yaskawa recommends installing a GFCI to the power
NV, EG, or SG Series supply side to protect drive wiring and to prevent other damage in
the event of component failure. An MCCB can also be used if
permitted by the power system.
Magnetic Contactor
(Input)
SC Series
Prevents potential damage to the braking resistor and other internal

circuitry by ensuring that power to drive is completely shut off
when necessary. Install an MCCB when using a braking resistor
to prevent the braking resistor from overheating.
Wire the MC so that it opens when a fault output terminal is
triggered to protect internal components from sudden high levels
of input current.
Interface Options
Remote LED Operator
JVOP-182
Remote operator with LED display and copy function; Cable

length max. 3 m
USB/Copy Unit
JVOP-181
Allows the user to copy and verify parameter settings between

drives. Can also be used as adapter to connect the drive to a PC
USB port.
Note: SI-232/JC option is required
RS-232C Serial
Communication Interface
SI-232/JC
RS-232/C communications interface to either connect the drive to

a PC, to the optional copy unit, or to the external LED operator
JVOP-182.
180
7.2 Drive Options and Peripheral Devices

Option
Model Number
Description
Remote Operator Interface SI-232/J
RS-232/C communications interface for use with either the

external LED operator JVOP-182, the optional copy unit, or for
connecting to a PC.
Potentiometer Option
AI-V3/J
Potentiometer option for setting the frequency reference directly

at the drive
Heatsink External
Mounting Attachment
EZZ020568
Mechanical Options
Installation kit for mounting the drive with the heatsink outside of
the panel (side-by-side mounting possible)
DIN Rail Attachment
EZZ08122
Installation kit for mounting the drive on a DIN rail
NEMA Type 1 Kit
EZZ020564
Parts to make the drive conform to NEMA Type 1 enclosure

Others
Drive Wizard Plus
PC tool for drive setup and parameter management

The installation files can be obtained at no charge from:
US: http://www.yaskawa.com
Other areas: Contact a Yaskawa representative.
Communication Options
RS-422/485 Serial
Communications Interface SI-485/J
Contact Yaskawa or your nearest Yaskawa representative for more information.

Options
<1>
Interface for RS-422/RS-485 communications using the

MEMOBUS/Modbus RTU protocol
181
7.3 Connecting Peripheral Devices
7.3
Connecting Peripheral Devices
Figure 7.1 illustrates connections between the drive, motor, and various peripheral devices.
Refer to peripheral device option manual for detailed installation instructions.
Engineering software tools
DriveWizardPlus
YASKAWA
LOCK
JVOP-181
ERR
COM
Ver
ify
Co
py
Line
breaker
(MCCB)
or
Leakage
breaker
ad
Power
supply
Re
USB Copy Unit
USB Copy Unit

(RJ-45/USB adapter)
USB cable
<1>
RJ-45 cable
(1m)
<2>
Dedicated Cable
(RJ-45/D-sub adapter)
(30cm)
PC
Drive
B1 B2
Surge
suppressor
AC reactor
Interface
Option
unit
Braking
resistor
unit
DC link choke
Ground
Input side
noise filter
+1 +2
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
U/T1 V/T2 W/T3
Output side
noise filter
Motor
Ground
Figure 7.1 Connecting Peripheral Devices
<1> NOTICE: Do not connect the LAN port on a PC and the comm. port of the RS-232/C
Interface Option Unit (SI-232/J and SI-232/JC). Failure to comply may damage the option
unit and the PC. Use the USB Copy Unit with an RJ-45 cable and USB cable as shown in
Figure 7.1 to connect the drive to a PC.
182
7.3 Connecting Peripheral Devices

<2> The Interface Option Unit can be directly connected to a PC with a D-sub 9-pin connector.
Use a cable designed for PC use (Yaskawa part number WV103).
If the drive is set to trigger an output terminal when performing a fault restart (L5-02 = 1), the power
supply will be shut off during fault restart as the drive outputs a fault signal. Keep this in mind when
designing a wiring sequence to interrupt the power to the drive. The default setting for the drive is to not
trigger an output terminal that indicates a fault restart is being performed (L5-02 = 0).

Options
Note:
183
7.4 Installing Peripheral Devices
7.4
Installing Peripheral Devices
This section describes the proper steps and precautions to take when installing or connecting
various peripheral devices to the drive.
Refer to peripheral device manual for detailed installation instructions.
NOTICE: Use a class 2 power supply (UL standard) when connecting to the control terminals. Improper
application of peripheral devices could result in drive performance degradation due to improper power supply.
u Installing a Molded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB) and Earth

Leakage Circuit Breaker (ELCB)
Install an MCCB or ELCB for line protection between the power supply and the main circuit
power supply input terminals R/L1, S/L2 and T/L3. This protects the main circuit and devices
wired to the main circuit while also providing overload protection.
Consider the following when selecting and installing an MCCB or ELCB:
The rated current of the MCCB or ELCB should be 1.5 to 2 times the rated output current
of the drive. Use an MCCB or ELCB with operation characteristics that do not trip the
MCCB or ELCB faster than the drive overload protection (shuts off the drive after 1 minute
of operation at 150% of the drive rated current).
If several drives are connected to one MCCB or an ELCB that is shared with other
equipment, use a sequence that shuts the power OFF when errors are output by using
magnetic contactor (MC) as shown in the following figure.
Drive
MCCB
MC
Power
Supply
MC
SA
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
MB
MC
MC
Figure 7.2 Connecting an MCCB
184
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Disconnect the MCCB (or ELCB) and MC before wiring terminals.
Failure to comply may result in serious injury or death.
u Application Precautions when Installing a GFCI

Drive outputs generate high-frequency leakage current as a result of high-speed switching.
Install a GFCI on the input side of the drive to switch off potentially harmful leakage current.
Factors in determining leakage current:
Size of the AC drive
AC drive carrier frequency
Motor cable type and length
EMI/RFI filter
If the GFCI trips spuriously, consider changing these items or use a GFCI with a higher trip
level.
Note:
Choose a GFCI designed specifically for an AC drive. The operation time should be at least 0.1 s with
sensitivity amperage of at least 200 mA per drive. The output waveform of the drive may cause an
increase in leakage current. This may in turn cause the leakage breaker to malfunction. Increase the
sensitivity amperage or lower the carrier frequency to correct the problem.
u Installing a Magnetic Contactor

n Disconnecting the Power Supply
NOTICE: Do not connect electromagnetic switches or MCs to the output motor circuits without proper
sequencing. Improper sequencing of output motor circuits may cause damage to the drive.
NOTICE: Install an MC on the input side of the drive when the drive should not automatically restart after
power loss. To get the full performance life out of the electrolytic capacitors and circuit relays, refrain from
switching the MC more than once every 30 minutes. Frequent use can damage the drive. Use the drive to
stop and start the motor.
Note:
1. Install an MC to the drive output to prevent the drive from restarting automatically when the power
is restored after momentary power loss.
2. Set up a delay for the MC so that it does not open prematurely for the drive to continue operating
through momentary power loss.
185

Options
The drive should be shut off in the case of a fault in external equipment such as braking
resistors through use of a Magnetic Contactor (MC).
n Protecting the Braking Resistor or Braking Resistor Unit

Use an MC on the input side of the drive to protect a braking resistor or braking resistor unit
from overheat or fire.
WARNING! Fire Hazard. When using a braking unit, use a thermal relay on the braking resistors and configure
a fault contact output for the braking resistor unit to disconnect drive main power via an input contactor.
Inadequate braking circuit protection could result in death or serious injury by fire from overheating resistors.
u Connecting an AC Reactor or DC Link Choke

AC reactors and DC link chokes suppress surges in current and improve the power factor on
the input side of the drive.
Use an AC reactor, DC link choke, or both:
To suppress harmonic current or improve the power factor of the power supply.
When using a phase advancing capacitor switch.
With a large capacity power supply transformer (over 600 kVA).
Note:
Use an AC reactor or DC link choke when also connecting a thyristor converter (such as a DC drive) to
the same power supply system, regardless of the conditions of the power supply.
n Connecting an AC Reactor
C
A
A Power supply
B MCCB
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
C AC reactor
D Drive
Figure 7.3 Connecting an AC Reactor
186
n Connecting a DC Link Choke

Ensure the jumper between terminals +1 and +2 (terminals are jumpered for shipment) is
removed when connecting a DC link choke. The jumper must be installed if no DC link choke
is used. Refer to Connecting a DC Link Choke on page 187 for an example of DC link choke
wiring.
C
A
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
+1
+2
D
A Power supply
B MCCB
C Drive
D DC link choke
Figure 7.4 Connecting a DC Link Choke
A surge suppressor suppresses transient voltages generated from switching an inductive load
near the drive. Inductive loads include magnetic contactors, relays, valves, solenoids and
brakes. Always use a surge suppressor or diode when operating with an inductive load.
Note:
Never connect a surge suppressor to the drive output.
u Connecting a Noise Filter

n Input-Side Noise Filter
Drive outputs generate noise as a result of high-speed switching. This noise flows from inside
the drive back toward the power supply, possibly affecting other equipment. Installing a noise
filter to the input side of the drive can reduce the amount of noise flowing back into the power
supply. This also prevents noise from entering the drive from the power supply.
Use a noise filter specifically designed for AC drives.
Install the noise filter as close as possible to the drive.
187

Options
u Connecting a Surge Suppressor
B
A
MCCB
1
R/L1
S/L2
MCCB
D
A Power supply
B Input-side noise filter
(Model: LNFB-)
C Drive
D Other control device
Figure 7.5 Input-Side Noise Filter (Single-Phase 200 V)
MCCB
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
E
MCCB
D
A Power supply
B Input-side noise filter
(Model: LNFD-)
C Drive
D Other control device
Figure 7.6 Input-Side Noise Filter (Three-Phase 200/400 V)
Refer to EMC Filter Installation on page 249 for details about EMC filter selection and
installation in order to make the drive compliant with European standards EN 61800-3:2004/
A1:2012 and the EMC guidelines.
n Output-Side Noise Filter

A noise filter on the output side of the drive reduces inductive noise and radiated noise. Figure
7.7 illustrates an example of output-side noise filter wiring.
188

NOTICE: Do not connect phase-advancing capacitors or LC/RC noise filters to the output circuits. Improper
application of noise filters could result in damage to the drive.
B
A
MCCB
R/L1
U/T1
S/L2
V/T2
T/L3
W/T3
A Power supply
B Drive
C Output-side noise filter

D Motor
Figure 7.7 Output-Side Noise Filter
Radiated Noise: Electromagnetic waves radiated from the drive and cables create noise
throughout the radio bandwidth that can affect devices.
Induced Noise: Noise generated by electromagnetic induction can affect the signal line
and may cause the controller to malfunction.
Preventing Induced Noise
Use a noise filter on the output side or use shielded cables. Lay the cables at least 30 cm away
from the signal line to prevent induced noise.
B
MCCB
C
R/L1
U/T1
S/L2
V/T2
T/L3
W/T3

Options
D
E
G
F
A
B
C
D
Power supply
Drive
Shielded motor cable
Motor
E Separate at least 30 cm
F Controller
G Signal line
Figure 7.8 Preventing Induced Noise
189

Reducing Radiated/Radio Frequency Noise
The drive, input lines, and output lines generate radio frequency noise. Use noise filters on
input and output sides and install the drive in a metal enclosure panel to reduce radio frequency
noise.
Note:
The cable running between the drive and motor should be as short as possible.
A
B
MCCB
A
B
C
D
R/L1
U/T1
S/L2
V/T2
T/L3
W/T3
Metal enclosure
Power supply
Noise filter
Drive
F
G
E Noise filter
F Shielded motor cable
G Motor
Figure 7.9 Reducing Radio Frequency Noise
u EMC Filter Installation

This drive is tested according to European standards IEC/EN 61800-5-1 and it complies with
the EMC guidelines. Refer to EMC Filter Installation on page 249 for details about EMC
filter selection and installation.
u Zero-Phase Reactor
A zero-phase reactor can be used to reduce the noise on the input and output sides of the drive.
190
C
A
Close-up of V/T2-phase wiring
1st pass
R/L1 U/T1
2nd pass
S/L2 V/T2
3rd pass
T/L3 W/T3
4th pass
Pass each wire (U/T1, V/T2, W/T3)

through the core 4 times.
A Power supply
B MCCB
C Zero-phase reactor on
input side
D Drive
E Zero-phase reactor on
output side
F Motor
Figure 7.10 Zero-Phase Reactor
u Installing Fuses on the Input Side

Always install input fuses to the input side of the as a protective measure against damage
caused by a short circuit.
Refer to Factory Recommended Drive Branch Circuit Protection on page 258 for details
on input fuse selection.
An external attachment can be used to project the heatsink outside of an enclosure to ensure
that there is sufficient air circulation around the heatsink. This installation method still requires
a certain amount of airflow over the drive case. Refer to Output Current Derating Due to
Ambient Temperature on page 211 if derating is required. Contact a Yaskawa sales
representative for more information.
u Noise Filter Installation

This drive has undergone testing in conformance with IEC/EN 61800-5-1 and is in compliance
with low voltage directives. Refer to EMC Guidelines Compliance on page 248 for
information on selecting a noise filter.
u Installing a Motor Thermal Overload (oL) Relay on the Drive

Output
Motor thermal overload relays protect the motor by disconnecting power lines to the motor
due to a motor overload condition.
Install a motor thermal overload relay between the drive and motor:
191

Options
u Attachment for External Heatsink

When operating multiple motors on a single AC drive.
When using a power line bypass to operate the motor directly from the power line.
It is not necessary to install a motor thermal overload relay when operating a single motor
from a single AC drive. The AC drive has UL recognized electronic motor overload protection
built into the drive software.
Note:
Disable the motor protection function (L1-0 1 = 0) when using an external motor thermal overload
relay. The relay should shut off main power on the input side of the main circuit when triggered.
n General Precautions when Using Thermal Overload Relays

The following application precautions should be considered when using motor thermal
overload relays on the output of AC drives in order to prevent nuisance trips or overheat of
the motor at low speeds:
Low speed motor operation
Use of multiple motors on a single AC drive
Motor cable length
Nuisance tripping resulting from high AC drive carrier frequency
Low Speed Operation and Motor Thermal oL Relays
Generally, thermal relays are applied on general-purpose motors. When general-purpose

motors are driven by AC drives, the motor current is approximately 5 to 10% greater than if
driven by the commercial power supply. In addition, the cooling capacity of a motor with a
shaft-driven fan decreases when operating at low speeds. Even if the load current is within
the motor rated value, motor overheating may occur. A thermal relay cannot effectively protect
the motor due to the reduction of cooling at low speeds. For this reason, apply the UL
recognized electronic thermal overload protection function built into the drive whenever
possible.
UL recognized electronic thermal overload function of the drive: Speed-dependent heat
characteristics are simulated using data from standard motors and force-ventilated motors.
The motor is protected from overload using this function.
Using One Drive with Multiple Motors
Turn off the electronic thermal overload function. Please refer to the appropriate product
instruction manual to determine which parameter disables this function.
The UL recognized electronic thermal overload function of the drive cannot be applied when
using multiple motors on one drive.
Long Motor Cables
When long motor cables and high carrier frequency are used, nuisance tripping of the thermal
relay may occur due to increased leakage current. Therefore, reduce the carrier frequency or
increase the tripping level of the thermal overload relay.
192

Nuisance Tripping Resulting from High AC Drive Carrier Frequency
Current waveforms generated by high carrier frequency PWM drives tend to create additional
temperature rise in overload relays. Therefore, it may be necessary to increase the trip level
setting when encountering nuisance triggering of the relay.
WARNING! Fire Hazard. Confirm an actual motor overload condition is not present prior to increasing the
thermal oL trip setting. Check local electrical codes before making adjustments to motor thermal overload
settings.
u NEMA Type 1 Kit

WARNING! Fire Hazard. Provide sufficient cooling when installing the drive inside an enclosed panel or
cabinet. Failure to comply could result in overheating and fire. When multiple drives are placed inside the
same enclosure panel, install proper cooling to ensure air entering the enclosure does not exceed 40 C.
The optional NEMA Type 1 kit can be installed to raise the enclosure protection level of an
IP20/Open-Chassis drive to NEMA Type 1. Drives with a NEMA Type 1 kit cannot be
installed using side-by-side mounting unless the top cover is removed. The drive does not
retain NEMA Type 1 integrity with the top cover removed. Refer to Installation Orientation
and Spacing on page 30 for installation instructions.
n Installation Environment
Table 7.2 Installation Environment
Environment
Ambient
Temperature
Conditions
-10 C to +40 C (NEMA Type 1/wall-mounted enclosure)
Drive reliability improves in environments without wide temperature fluctuations.
When using an enclosure panel, install a cooling fan or air conditioner in the area to ensure
that the air temperature inside the enclosure does not exceed the specified levels.
Do not allow ice to develop on the drive.

Options
Refer to Installation Environment on page 29 for all other installation environment specifications.
193
n Exterior and Mounting Dimensions for NEMA Type 1 Kit

Table 7.3 IP20/Open-Chassis Design Fitted with the NEMA Type 1 Kit
D2
2-M4
H1
H4
H2
t1
H5
W1
H3
D1
W
Drive
Model
NEMA
Type 1 Kit
Model
EZZ
BA0001B
Dimensions (in)
W
W1
H1
H2
H3
020564A
2.7
5.8
3.0
2.2
5.0
4.6
0.2
BA0002B
020564A
2.7
5.8
3.0
2.2
5.0
4.6
0.2
BA0003B
020564B
2.7
5.8
4.6
2.2
5.0
4.6
0.2
H5
H6
D1
D2
t1
Wt.
(lb)
0.8
0.2
0.06
0.3
2.7
0.1
1.8
0.8
0.2
0.06
0.3
2.7
0.1
1.8
0.8
0.2
0.06
1.5
4.3
0.2
2.7
H4

2A0001B
020564A
2.7
5.8
3.0
2.2
5.0
4.6
0.2
0.8
0.2
0.06
0.3
2.7
0.1
1.8
2A0002B
020564A
2.7
5.8
3.0
2.2
5.0
4.6
0.2
0.8
0.2
0.06
0.3
2.7
0.1
1.8
2A0004B
020564A
2.7
5.8
4.3
2.2
5.0
4.6
0.2
0.8
0.2
0.06
1.5
3.9
0.1
2.4
2A0006B
020564A
2.7
5.8
5.0
2.2
5.0
4.6
0.2
0.8
0.2
0.06
2.3
4.7
0.1
2.9
194

Table 7.4 IP20/Open-Chassis Design Fitted with the NEMA Type 1 Kit
W1
D2
H1
H4
t1
D1
H3
H2
H5
4-M4
Drive
Model
NEMA
Type 1 Kit
Model
EZZ
BA0006B
BA0010B
Dimensions (in)
W
W1
H1
H2
H3
H4
020564C
4.3
5.9
5.4
3.8
5.0
0.18
0.2
0.8
020564D
4.3
5.9
6.1
3.8
5.0
0.18
0.2
0.8
H5
H6
D1
0.2
0.06
2.3
0.2
0.06
2.3
t1
Wt.
(lb)
5.1
0.2
4.2
5.7
0.2
4.4
D2

2A0010B
020564G
4.3
5.9
5.1
3.8
5.0
0.18
0.2
0.8
0.2
0.06
2.3
4.7
0.2
4.2
2A0012B
020564C
4.3
5.9
5.4
3.8
5.0
0.18
0.2
0.8
0.2
0.06
2.3
5.1
0.2
4.2
2A0020B
020564H
4.3
5.9
5.6
5.0
5.0
0.18
0.2
0.8
0.2
0.2
2.6
5.3
0.2
5.7
2.6

4A0001B
020564G
4.3
5.9
3.2
3.8
5.0
0.18
0.2
0.8
0.2
0.06
0.4
2.9
0.2
4A0002B
020564G
4.3
5.9
3.9
3.8
5.0
0.18
0.2
0.8
0.2
0.06
1.1
3.6
0.2
3.1
4A0004B
020564C
4.3
5.9
5.4
3.8
5.0
0.18
0.2
0.8
0.2
0.06
2.3
5.1
0.2
4.2
4A0005B
020564J
4.3
5.9
6.1
3.8
5.0
0.18
0.2
0.8
0.2
0.06
2.3
5.7
0.2
4.2
4A0007B
020564J
4.3
5.9
6.1
3.8
5.0
0.18
0.2
0.8
0.2
0.06
2.3
5.7
0.2
4.2
4A0009B
020564J
4.3
5.9
6.1
3.8
5.0
0.18
0.2
0.8
0.2
0.06
2.3
5.7
0.2
4.2
4A0011B
020564H
4.3
5.9
5.6
5.0
5.0
0.18
0.2
0.8
0.2
0.2
2.6
5.3
0.2
5.7
195

Options
n Removing the Protective Covers on a NEMA Type 1 Design (Using

the NEMA Type 1 Kit Option for the NEMA Type 1 Rating)
1.
Loosen the screw on the front cover to remove the front cover.
Figure 7.11 Remove the Front Cover
2.
Loosen the screw on the terminal cover (Figure 7.12, B) to remove the terminal cover
and expose the conduit bracket (Figure 7.12, A).
A
B
Figure 7.12 Remove the Terminal Cover
3.
196
Loosen two screws attaching the conduit bracket (Figure 7.13, A) to remove.
A
Figure 7.13 Remove the Conduit Bracket
n Reattaching the Protective Covers

Options
Pass power wiring and control signal wiring through the exit holes on the bottom of the conduit
bracket of the drive. Place power wiring and control signal wiring in separate conduits.
Properly connect all wiring after installing the drive and connecting other devices. Reattach
all protective covers when wiring is complete.
A
A Pass power wiring and control signal wiring through different
exit holes at the bottom of the drive.
Figure 7.14 Reattach the Protective Covers and Conduit Bracket
197
7.5 Options
7.5
Options
Table 7.5 and Table 7.6 give detailed information about the available options that allow
Yaskawa drives to connect to communication networks. A host controller can control and
monitor the drive, read and change parameters by using a communication option. Contact
Yaskawa or your Yaskawa agent to order options.
Option Selection: Refer to Yaskawa catalog for more details on option card selection and
part numbers.
Option Installation: Refer to option unit manual for option unit installation instructions.
u Interface Options
Table 7.5 Interface Option Units
Option
Model
RS-232C Interface
SI-232/J
Function
RS-232C Interface
(Removable)
SI-232/JC
Allows the user to take advantage of the USB Copy Unit option
and the Remote LED Operator option.
RS-422/RS-485 Interface for

MEMOBUS/Modbus
Communication
SI-485/J
Allows the drive to connect to a network using MEMOBUS/

Modbus RTU protocol. Option includes a communication cable
connector.
Potentiometer
AI-V3/J
Allows for easier speed control.
Allows the user to connect an extension cable for remote

operation and for use with Drive Wizard Plus.
u Other Options
Table 7.6 Other Options
Option
Model
Function
Remote LED Operator
JVOP-182
Allows for remote operation when using the optional LED

operator. This option is used in combination with the LED
extension cable and the RS-232C interface. Option includes a
Copy function for saving drive settings.
USB Copy Unit
JVOP-181
Saves and transfers parameter settings and connects to a PC for

operation with Drive Wizard Plus. This option is used in
combination with the RS-232C interface.
198
Appendix: A
Specifications
A.1 HEAVY DUTY AND NORMAL DUTY RATINGS 200
A.2 SINGLE/THREE-PHASE 200 V CLASS
DRIVES...........................................................201
A.3 THREE-PHASE 400 V CLASS DRIVES............ 203
A.4 DRIVE SPECIFICATIONS................................ 205
A.5 DRIVE WATT LOSS DATA...............................209
A.6 DRIVE DERATING DATA.................................211
199
A.1 Heavy Duty and Normal Duty Ratings
A.1
Heavy Duty and Normal Duty Ratings
The capacity of the drive is based on two types of load characteristics: Heavy Duty (HD) and
Normal Duty (ND).
Refer to Selecting the Appropriate Load Rating on page 200 for the differences between
HD and ND. Specifications for capacity ratings are listed on the following pages.
Table A.1 Selecting the Appropriate Load Rating
Setting
Parameter
C6-01
Rated Output Current
Overload Tolerance
Default Carrier
Frequency
HD Rating
varies by model <1>
150% rated output current for 60 s
8/10 kHz
varies by model
1: Normal Duty ND Rating

(default)
varies by model <1>
120% rated output current for 60 s

varies by model
2 kHz, Swing PWM
0: Heavy Duty
<1>
The following pages list information on rating changes based on drive model.
TERMS
Note:
200
HD and ND: HD refers to applications requiring constant torque output,

while ND refers to applications with variable torque needs. The drive allows
the user to select HD or ND torque depending on the application. Fans,
pumps, and blowers should use ND (C6-01 = 1), and other applications
generally use HD (C6-01 = 0).
Swing PWM: Swing PWM equivalent to a 2 kHz audible noise. This
function turns the motor noise into a less obtrusive white noise.
Differences between HD ratings and ND ratings for the drive include rated input and output current,
overload capacity, carrier frequency, and current limit. The default setting is for ND (C6-01 = 1).
A.2 Single/Three-Phase 200 V Class Drives
A.2
Single/Three-Phase 200 V Class Drives

Table A.2 Power Ratings
Item
Specification
Three-Phase Drive Model
2A0001
2A0002
2A0004
2A0006
2A0010
2A0012
2A0020
Single-Phase Drive Model <1>
BA0001
BA0002
BA0003
BA0006
BA0010
ND Rating
0.125
& 0.25
0.25
0.5
& 0.75
1.0 &
1.5
2.0 &
3.0
3.0
5.0
HD Rating
0.125
0.25
0.5
0.75 & 1
2.0
3.0
5.0
ND Rating
1.1
1.9
3.9
7.3
10.8
13.9
24.0
HD Rating
0.7
1.5
2.9
5.8
7.5
11.0
18.9
ND Rating
2.0
3.6
7.3
13.8
20.2
HD Rating
1.4
2.8
5.5
11.0
14.1
Rated Output Capacity ND Rating

(kVA) <4>
HD Rating
0.5
0.7
1.3
2.3
3.7
4.6
7.5
0.3
0.6
1.1
1.9
3.0
4.2
6.7
6.0
9.6
12.0
19.6
5.0
<6>
8.0
<7>
11.0
<7>
17.5
<7>
Input
Current (A)
<3>
Input
ThreePhase
SinglePhase
Output Current (A)
ND Rating
<5>
1.2
1.9
3.5
(3.3)
HD Rating
0.8 <6>
1.6
<6>
3.0
<6>
Output
Overload Tolerance
Power
Supply
Carrier Frequency
2 kHz (user-set, 2 to 15 kHz)
Max Output Voltage (V)
Three-phase power: 200 to 240 V

Single-phase power: 200 to 240 V
(both proportional to input voltage)
Max Output Frequency (Hz)
400 Hz (user-adjustable)
Rated Voltage
Rated Frequency
Three-phase power: 200 to 240 V 50/60 Hz

Single-phase power: 200 to 240 V 50/60 Hz
DC power supply: 270 to 340 V <8>
Allowable Voltage Fluctuation
-15 to 10%
Allowable Frequency Fluctuation
5%
Harmonic Corrective
Actions
<1>
<2>
<3>
ND Rating: 120% of rated output current for 1 minute

HD Rating: 150% of rated output current for 1 minute
(Derating may be required for applications that start and stop
frequently)
DC Link Choke
Specifications
Maximum Motor Size Allowed

(HP) <2>
Optional
Drives with a single-phase power supply input will output three-phase power and cannot run a single-phase
motor.
Horsepower rating is based on 230 V Induction-Type Squirrel Cage NEMA B 4-Pole Motors as represented in
NEC Table 430.250 Full-Load Current, Three-Phase Alternating-Current Motors.
Input current rating varies depending on the power supply transformer, input reactor, wiring connections, and
power supply impedance.
201
A.2 Single/Three-Phase 200 V Class Drives

<4>
<5>
<6>
<7>
<8>
Rated motor capacity is calculated with a rated output voltage of 220 V.

Carrier frequency is set to 2 kHz (Swing PWM). Current derating is required to raise the carrier frequency.
Carrier frequency is set to 10 kHz. Current derating is required to raise the carrier frequency.
DC is not available for UL standards.
Note:
202
Differences between Heavy Duty (HD) ratings and Normal Duty (ND) ratings for the drive include rated
input and output current, overload capacity, carrier frequency and current limit. Set parameter C6-01 to
0 for HD or 1 for ND (default).
A.3 Three-Phase 400 V Class Drives
A.3
Three-Phase 400 V Class Drives

Table A.3 Power Ratings
Item
Specification
Maximum Applicable Motor

Capacity (HP) <1>
Input
Input Current (A)

<2>
Output Current
(kVA) <3>
Output Current (A)

Output
4A0001
4A0002
4A0004
0.5
0.75 &
1
HD Rating
0.5
0.75
1&2
ND Rating
1.2
2.1
4.3
5.9
8.1
9.4
14.0
HD Rating
1.2
1.8
3.2
4.4
6.0
8.2
10.4
ND Rating
<4>
0.9
1.6
3.1
4.1
5.3
6.7
8.5
HD Rating
<5>
0.9
1.4
2.6
3.7
4.2
5.5
7.0
ND Rating
<4>
1.2
2.1
4.1
5.4
6.9
8.8
11.1
HD Rating
<5>
1.2
1.8
3.4
4.8
5.5
7.2
9.2
ND Rating
Overload Tolerance
Power
Supply
<2>
<3>
<4>
<5>
7.5
ND Rating: 120% of rated output current for 60 s

HD Rating: 150% of rated output current for 60 s
(Derating may be required for applications that start and stop
frequently)
Carrier Frequency
2 kHz (user-adjustable from 2 to 15 kHz)
Maximum Output Voltage (V)
Three-phase power: 380 to 480 V (proportional to input voltage)
Maximum Output Frequency (Hz)
400 Hz (user-adjustable)
Rated Voltage
Rated Frequency
Three-phase power: 380 to 480 V 50/60 Hz

DC power supply: 510 to 680 V <6>
Allowable Voltage Fluctuation
-15 to 10%
Allowable Frequency Fluctuation
5%
Harmonic Corrective Actions

<1>
4A0005 4A0007 4A0009 4A0011
DC Link
Choke
Optional
Horsepower rating is based on 460 V Induction-Type Squirrel Cage NEMA B 4-Pole Motors as represented in
NEC Table 430.250 Full-Load Current, Three-Phase Alternating-Current Motors.
Input current rating varies depending on the power supply transformer, input reactor, wiring conditions, and
power supply impedance.
Rated motor capacity is calculated with a rated output voltage of 440 V.
Carrier frequency is set to 2 kHz (Swing PWM). Current derating is required to raise the carrier frequency.
203
Specifications
Three-Phase Drive Model
A.3 Three-Phase 400 V Class Drives

<6>
DC is not available for UL standards.
Note:
204
Differences between Heavy Duty (HD) ratings and Normal Duty (ND) ratings for the drive include rated
input and output current, overload capacity, carrier frequency and current limit. Set parameter C6-01 to
0 for HD or 1 for ND (default).
A.4 Drive Specifications
A.4
Note:
Drive Specifications
For optimum performance life of the drive, install the drive in an environment that meets the
environmental conditions.
Item
Specification
Control Method
Frequency Control
Range
V/f Control
0.01 to 400 Hz
Digital input: within 0.01% of the max output frequency (-10 to +50
Frequency Accuracy C)
Analog input: within 0.5% of the max output frequency (25 C 10 C)
Frequency Setting
Resolution
Digital inputs: 0.01 Hz

Analog inputs: 1/1000 of maximum output frequency
Output Frequency
Calculation
Resolution
1/220 x Maximum output frequency (E104)
Frequency Setting
Signal
Main frequency reference: 0 to +10 Vdc (20 k), 4 to 20 mA (250 ),

0 to 20 mA (250 )
Starting Torque
150%/3 Hz
Speed Control Range 1: 20~40

0.00 to 6000.0 s (allows four separate settings for accel and decel)
Braking Torque
Instantaneous Average Decel Torque <1> : 0.1/0.2 kW: over 150%,

0.4/0.75 kW: over 100%, 1.5 kW: over 50%, 2.2 kW and above: over
20%
Continuous Regen Torque: 20%,
125% with a Braking Resistor Unit <2> : (10% ED) 10 s with an internal
braking resistor.
V/f Characteristics
Functions
User-set, programmable.
Momentary Power Loss Ride-Thru

Speed Search
Multi-Step Speed (9 steps max)
Accel/Decel Time Switch
S-Curve Accel/Decel
2-Wire/3-Wire Sequence
Cooling Fan ON/OFF
Slip Compensation
Torque Compensation
Jump Frequencies (reference dead band)
Frequency Reference Upper/Lower Limit
DC Injection Braking (start and stop)
Overexcitation Braking
Fault Reset
Specifications
Control
Characteristics
Accel/Decel Time
205

Item
Specification
Motor Protection
Overcurrent
Protection
Protection
Functions
Motor overheat protection via output current sensor

Drives stops when output exceeds 200% of the rated current (Heavy
Duty)
Overload Protection
A stop command will be entered after operating at 150% for 60 s (Heavy

Duty) <3>
Overvoltage
Specification
200 V class: Stops when DC bus voltage exceeds approximately 410 V

400 V class: Stops when DC bus voltage exceeds approximately 820 V
Low Voltage
Protection
Drive stops when DC bus voltage falls below the levels indicated:
190 V (3-phase 200 V), 160 V (single-phase 200 V), 380 V (3-phase 400
V), 350 V (3-phase 380 V)
Momentary Power
Loss Ride-Thru
Stops after 15 ms
Heatsink Overheat
Protection
Protected by thermistor
Braking Resistor
Overheat Protection Overheat input signal for braking resistor (Optional ERF-type, 3% ED)
Stall Prevention
During acceleration and during run: Separate settings for each type of
stall prevention determine the current level at which stall prevention is
triggered.
During deceleration: Select, enable/disable.
Cooling Fan Failure Circuit protection (fan-lock sensor)

Protection
Ground Fault
Protection
Electronic circuit protection <4>
DC Bus Charge LED Remains lit until DC bus voltage falls below 50 V
206

Item
Specification
Storage/Installation
Area
Ambient
Temperature
Humidity
Indoors
95% RH or less with no condensation
to +60 C (-4 to +140 F) allowed for short-term transport of the

Storage Temperature -20
product
Environment
Shock, Impact
Surrounding Area
Orientation
Standards
Protective Enclosure
Cooling Method
<1>
<2>
<3>
<4>
Up to 1000 meters without derating; up to 3000 meters with output

current and voltage derating.
10 to 20 Hz: 9.8 m/s2
20 to 55 Hz: 5.9 m/s2
Install the drive in an area free from:
oil mist and dust
metal shavings, oil, water or other foreign materials
radioactive materials
combustible materials
harmful gases and liquids
excessive vibration
chlorides
direct sunlight
Install the drive vertically to maintain maximum cooling effects
UL508C
EN 61800-3:2004/A1:2012, IEC/EN 61800-5-1
IP20/Open-Chassis
IP20/NEMA Type 1 <5>
BA0001 to BA0006: self-cooled
BA0010: cooling fan
2A0001 to 2A0004: self-cooled
2A0006 to 2A0020: cooling fan
4A0001 to 4A0004: self-cooled
4A0005 to 4A0011: cooling fan
Instantaneous average deceleration torque refers to the torque required to decelerate the motor (uncoupled from
the load) from the rated motor speed down to zero in the shortest time.
Ensure that Stall Prevention Selection during Deceleration is disabled (L3-04 = 0) or set to 3 when using a
braking resistor or the Braking Resistor Unit. The default setting for the stall prevention function will interfere
with the braking resistor.
Overload protection may be triggered when operating with 150% of the rated output current if the output
frequency is less than 6 Hz.
Ground protection cannot be provided under the following circumstances when a ground fault is likely in the
motor windings during run: Low ground resistance for the motor cable and terminal block; low ground resistance
for the motor cable and terminal block; or the drive is powered up from a ground short.
207
Specifications
Altitude

<5>
208
All models have an IP20/Open-Chassis enclosure as standard. Use the NEMA Type 1 Kit option to convert
drives to an IP20/NEMA Type 1 enclosure rating.
A.5 Drive Watt Loss Data
A.5
Drive Watt Loss Data

Table A.4 Watt Loss 200 V Class Single-Phase Models
Drive
Model
Heavy Duty (Carrier Frequency 8/10 kHz)

<1>
Normal Duty (Swing PWM equal 2 kHz)
Rated
Heatsink Interior
Total
Rated
Heatsink Interior
Total
Loss Loss
Loss Loss
Amps (A) Loss (W) Unit(W)
(W) Amps (A) Loss (W) Unit(W)
(W)
BA0001
0.8
4.3
7.4
11.7
1.2
5.0
8.5
13.5
BA0002
1.6
7.9
8.9
16.7
1.9
7.6
9.7
17.3
BA0003
3.0
16.1
11.5
27.7
3.3
14.6
14.4
29.1
BA0006
5.0
33.7
16.8
50.5
6.0
30.1
19.4
49.5
BA0010
8.0
54.8
25.9
80.7
9.6
51.7
29.8
81.4
<1>
10 kHz for BA0001 to BA0006

Table A.5 Watt Loss 200 V Class Three-Phase Models
Heavy Duty (Carrier Frequency 8/10 kHz)
<1>
Rated
Heatsink Interior
Total
Rated
Heatsink Interior
Total
Loss Loss
Loss Loss
(W)
2A0001
0.8
4.3
7.3
11.6
1.2
5.0
8.0
13.0
2A0002
1.6
7.9
8.8
16.7
1.9
7.6
9.5
17.1
2A0004
3.0
16.2
11.5
27.7
3.5
15.8
13.6
29.4
2A0006
5.0
27.4
15.9
43.3
6.0
27.5
17.2
44.7
2A0010
8.0
54.8
23.8
78.6
9.6
51.7
25.8
77.5
2A0012
11.0
70.7
29.9
100.6
12.0
61.3
30.4
91.7
2A0020
17.5
110.5
43.3
153.8
19.6
98.7
46.3
145.0
<1>
10 kHz for 2A0001 to2A0006

Table A.6 Watt Loss 400 V Class Three-Phase Models
Heavy Duty (Carrier Frequency 8 kHz)
Drive
Model
Rated
Heatsink Interior
Total
Rated
Heatsink Interior
Total
Loss Loss
Loss Loss
(W)
4A0001
1.2
19.2
11.5
30.7
1.2
10.0
9.6
19.6
4A0002
1.8
28.9
14.8
43.7
2.1
18.5
13.9
32.4
4A0004
3.4
42.3
17.9
60.2
4.1
30.5
16.8
47.3
4A0005
4.8
70.7
26.2
96.9
5.4
44.5
21.8
66.3
Specifications
Drive
Model
209
A.5 Drive Watt Loss Data

Heavy Duty (Carrier Frequency 8 kHz)
Drive
Model
Rated
Heatsink Interior
Total
Rated
Heatsink Interior
Total
Loss Loss
Loss Loss
(W)
4A0007
5.5
81.0
30.7
111.7
6.9
58.5
28.4
4A0009
7.2
84.6
32.9
117.5
8.8
63.7
31.4
95.1
4A0011
9.2
107.2
41.5
148.7
11.1
81.7
46.0
127.7
210
86.9
A.6 Drive Derating Data
A.6
Drive Derating Data
The drive can be operated at above rated temperature, altitude and default carrier frequency
by derating the drive capacity.
u Temperature Derating
As the ambient temperature for the drive is increased above the drive specification the drive
should be derated. Additionally parameter L8-35 Installation Method Selection on page 211
should be set according to enclosure type and mounting method as illustrated in Figure A.1.
n Output Current Derating Due to Ambient Temperature

Set L8-12 and L8-35 according to the installation conditions when the ambient temperature
is above the drive specification or if drives are side-by-side mounted in a cabinet. The output
current is derated as shown in Figure A.1.
No.
<1>
Description
Range
Def.
L8-12
Ambient
Temperature
Setting
Name
Adjust the drive overload (oL2) protection level when the

drive is installed in an environment that exceeds its ambient
temperature rating.
-10 to 50
30 C
L8-35
Installation
Method
Selection
0: IP20/IP00 Drive
1: Side-by-Side Mounting
2: NEMA Type 1 Drive <1>
3: Finless Drive or External Heatsink Installation
0 to 3
This selection assumes that the drive is fitted with the NEMA Type 1 Kit option.
Parameter L8-35 = 0 (IP20/IP00 Drive)

100%
Parameter L8-35 = 2
(NEMA Type 1 Drive)
85%
80%
Drive 70%
Rating
50%
Specifications
Parameter L8-35 = 3
(Finless Drive or External
Heatsink Installation)
Parameter L8-35 = 1
(Side-by-side Mounting)
30
35 40
50
Ambient temp C
Parameter L8-12
Figure A.1 Ambient Temperature and Installation Method Derating
211
A.6 Drive Derating Data
u Altitude Derating
The drive standard ratings are valid for an installation altitude up to 1000 m. If the altitude
exceeds 1000 m, both the drive input voltage and the rated output current must be derated for
1% per 100 m. The maximum altitude is 3000 m.
212
Appendix: B
Parameter List
This appendix contains a full listing of all parameters and settings
available in the drive.
B.1 PARAMETER GROUPS...................................214

B.2 PARAMETER TABLE......................................215
B.3 DEFAULTS BY DRIVE MODEL AND DUTY
RATING ND/HD...............................................238
213
B.1 Parameter Groups
B.1
Parameter Groups
Table B.1 Parameter Groups
Paramet
er Group
214
Name
Page
Paramet
er Group
Name
Page
A1
Initialization
215
H5
Serial Communications Setup
227
b1
Operation Mode Selection
216
L1
Motor Overload
229
b2
DC Injection Braking
217
L2
Power Loss Ride-Thru
229
C1
Acceleration/Deceleration Time
217
L3
Stall Prevention
229
C2
S-Curve Accel/Decel
217
L4
Reference Detection
230
C3
Motor Slip Compensation
218
L5
Fault Restart
231
C4
Motor Torque Compensation
218
L6
Overtorque Detection
231
C6
Carrier Frequency
218
L8
Hardware Protection
231
d1
Frequency Reference
220
n1
Hunting Prevention
233
d2
Reference Limits
220
n3
Overexcitation Braking
233
d3
Jump Frequencies
220
o1
Monitor Display Selection
233
d4
Frequency Reference Hold
221
o2
Operator Keypad Functions
233
E1
V/f Pattern
222
o3
Copy Function
234
E2
Motor Setup
222
o4
Maintenance Functions
234
H1
Digital Inputs
223
U1
Status Monitor
235
H2
Digital Outputs
225
U2
Fault History
237
H3
Analog Inputs
226
U4
Maintenance Monitor
237
H4
Analog Outputs
227
B.2 Parameter Table
B.2
Parameter Table
An O in the Mode column indicates that the parameter is available in the Advanced menu.
An S in the Mode column indicates that the parameter is available in the Startup menu.
u A: Initialization Parameters
The A parameter group creates the operating environment for the drive. This includes the
parameter Access Level, and Password.
No.
Name
Description
Range Def. Mode Addr.

Hex Pg.
A1: Initialization Parameters

Use A1 parameters to configure the basic environment for drive operation.
A1-01 Access Level
<1> Selection
Selects which parameters are accessible via the

digital operator.
0: Operation only
2: Advanced Access Level
A1-03 Initialize
Parameters
Resets all parameters to factory default settings.

(Initializes the drive then returns A1-03 to 0)
0: No Initialization
101
117
0 to
3330
103
88
E1-03, L8-35, o2-04, o2-09, and all U2

monitors are not reset when performing
initialization.
0
104
117
0 to
0
O
105
117
When the value set into A1-04 does not match the
9999
value set into A1-05, parameters A1-01 and A1-03
This
parameter
is
hidden
from
view.
To
cannot be changed.
access A1-05, first display A1-04.
Then press the STOP key while holding
down the up arrow key. Parameter
A1-05 will appear.
Parameter can be changed during run.
Parameter List
<1>
0 to
9999
A1-04 Password
A1-05 Password
Setting
0, 2
B
215
B.2 Parameter Table
u b: Application
Application parameters configure the Run Command Source, DC Injection Braking, and other
application-related settings.
No.
Name
Description

Hex Pg.
b1: Operation Mode Selection

Use b1 parameters to configure the operation mode.
Frequency
b1-01 Reference
Selection
Selects the frequency reference input source.

0: Digital Operator - Digital preset speed d1-01 to
d1-08
1: Terminals - Analog input terminal A1
2: MEMOBUS/Modbus communications (option)
3: Potentiometer (option)
0 to 3
180
88
Run
b1-02 Command
Selection
Selects the run command input source.

0: Digital Operator - RUN and STOP keys on the
digital operator
1: Digital input terminals
2: MEMOBUS/Modbus communications (option)
0 to 2
181
90
Stopping
b1-03 Method
Selection
Selects the stopping method when the run command

is removed.
0: Ramp to Stop
1: Coast to Stop
0, 1
182
92
Reverse
b1-04 Operation
Selection
Permits or prohibits reverse operation.

0: Reverse enabled.
1: Reverse disabled.
0, 1
183
0, 1
186
Determines the operation when the Run command

source is switched from LOCAL to REMOTE or
between REMOTE and MEMOBUS/Modbus
LOCAL/
b1-07 REMOTE Run communication.
0: External Run command has to be cycled at the new
Selection
source to be activated.
1: External Run command at new source is accepted
immediately.
Run
Command
b1-08 Selection
while in
Programming
Mode
0: Run command accepted only in the operation

menu.
1: Run command accepted in all menus.
2: Prohibit entering Programming Mode during Run
0 to 2
187
Order
b1-14 Phase
Selection
Sets the phase order for drive output terminals U/T1,

V/T2 and W/T3.
0 : Standard
1 : Switch phase order
0, 1
1C3
Run
b1-17 Command at
Power Up
Determines the operation when a Run command is

active at power up of the drive.
0: Run command not issued, needs to be cycled
1: Run command issued, motor operation start
0, 1
1C6
216
B.2 Parameter Table

No.
Name
Description

Hex Pg.
b2: DC Injection Braking

Use b2 parameters to configure DC Injection Braking operation
DC Injection
b2-02 Braking
Current
Sets the DC Injection Braking current as a percentage 0 to 75

of the drive rated current.
50%
18A
0.00 to
10.00
0.00
s
18B
Sets DC Injection Braking time at stop.

When b1-03 = 0, this parameter sets the amount of 0.00 to
DC Injection time applied to the motor at the end of 10.00
the decel ramp. Disabled when set to 0.00.
0.50
s
18C
DC Injection
b2-03 Braking Time/ Sets DC Injection Braking time at start. Disabled
DC Excitation when set to 0.00 seconds.
Time at Start
DC Injection
b2-04 Braking Time
at Stop
u C: Tuning
C parameters are used to adjust the acceleration and deceleration times, S-curves, slip and
torque compensation functions and carrier frequency selections.
No.
Name
Description

Hex Pg.
C1: Acceleration and Deceleration Times

Use C1 parameters to configure motor acceleration and deceleration.
Sets the time to accelerate from 0 to maximum
frequency.
200
93
C1-02 Deceleration
<1> Time 1
Sets the time to decelerate from maximum frequency

to 0.
201
93
C1-03 Acceleration
<1> Time 2
Sets the time to accelerate from 0 to maximum

frequency when Accel/Decel times 2 are selected by
a digital input.
202
93
C1-04 Deceleration
<1> Time 2

to 0 when Accel/Decel times 2 are selected by a
digital input.
203
93
C1-09 Fast-Stop
Time

to 0 for the multi-function input fast-stop function.
Note: This parameter is also used by selecting FastStop as a Stop Method when a fault is detected.
208
0.0 to
6000.0
10.0
s
Parameter List
C1-01 Acceleration
<1> Time 1
C2: S-Curve Characteristics

Use C2 parameters to configure S-curve operation.
B
217
B.2 Parameter Table

No.
Name

Hex Pg.
Description
S-Curve
The S-curve can be controlled in the four points
C2-01 Characteristic shown below.
at Accel Start
S-Curve
C2-02 Characteristic
at Accel End
S-Curve
C2-03 Characteristic
at Decel Start
Run
command
Output
frequency
ON
C2-02
OFF
C2-03
C2-04
0.00 to
10.00
0.20
s
20B
0.00 to
10.00
0.20
s
20C
0.00 to
10.00
0.20
s
20D
0.00
s
20E
C2-01
Time
S-Curve
0.00 to
C2-04 Characteristic S-curve is used to further soften the starting and
10.00
at Decel End stopping ramp. The longer the S-curve time, the
softer the starting and stopping ramp.
C3: Slip Compensation

Use C3 parameters to configure the slip compensation function.
Slip
C3-01 Compensation
<1> Gain
Slip
Compensation
C3-02 Primary Delay

Time
Sets the slip compensation gain. Decides for what

amount the output frequency is boosted in order to
compensate the slip.
Note: Adjustment is not normally required.
0.0 to
2.5
0.0
20F
Adjusts the slip compensation function delay time.

Decrease the setting when the slip compensation
response is too slow, increase it when the speed is
not stable.
0 to
10000
2000
ms
210
215
223
95
C4: Torque Compensation

Use C4 parameters to configure Torque Compensation function.
Torque
C4-01 Compensation
<1> Gain
Sets the gain for the automatic torque (voltage) boost

function and helps to produce better starting torque.
Increase this setting when using a long motor cable
or when the motor is significantly smaller than the 0.00 to
drive capacity.
2.50
Decrease this setting when motor oscillation occurs.
Set the value so that the current at low speed does not
exceeds the drive rated current.
1.00
C6: Carrier Frequency

Use C6 parameters to configure the carrier frequency drive settings.
Duty
C6-01 Drive
Selection
218
Selects the load rating for the drive.

0: Heavy Duty (HD) for constant torque applications.
1: Normal Duty (ND) for variable torque
applications.
This setting affects the Rated output current and
overload tolerance of the drive.
0, 1
B.2 Parameter Table

No.
Name
Description

Hex Pg.
Carrier
C6-02 Frequency
Selection
Selects the carrier frequency

1 : 2.0 kHz
2 : 5.0 kHz
3 : 8.0 kHz
4 : 10.0 kHz
5 : 12.5 kHz
6 : 15.0 kHz
7 : Swing PWM
8 to E : No setting possible
F: User defined (determined by C6-03 through
C6-05)
1 to F
<2>
224
95
Carrier
C6-03 Frequency
Upper Limit
C6-03 and C6-04 set upper and lower limits for the
carrier frequency.
Note: Set C6-02 to F before setting C6-03.
1.0 to
15.0
<3>
225
1.0 to
15.0
<3>
226
00 to 99 <3>
227
carrier frequency
C6-03
C6-04
Carrier
C6-04 Frequency
Lower Limit
output frequency
(C6-05) K
output
frequency
E1-04
max output
frequency
The coefficient K depends on C6-03:

C6-03 10.0 kHz: K = 3
10.0 kHz > C6-03 5.0 kHz: K = 2
5.0 kHz > C6-03: K = 1
When C6-05 6, C6-04 is disabled (makes the
carrier frequency C6-03 value).
Carrier
C6-05 Frequency
Proportional
Gain

Default setting value is dependent on parameter o2-04, Drive Model Selection and C6-01, Drive Duty Selection.
Default setting value is dependent on parameter C6-02, Carrier Frequency Selection.
Parameter List
<1>
<2>
<3>
Sets the relationship of output frequency to carrier

frequency when C6-02 = F.
B
219
B.2 Parameter Table
u d: References
Reference parameters are used to set the various frequency reference values during operation.
No.
Name
Description

Hex Pg.
d1: Frequency Reference

Use d1 parameters to configure the drive frequency reference.
d1-01 Frequency
<1> Reference 1
Frequency reference. Refer to Frequency Reference

Source: b1-01 on page 88 for instructions to use
d1-01 as the main frequency reference.
0.00
Hz
280
97
d1-02 Frequency
<1> Reference 2
Frequency reference when digital input "Multi-Step

Speed Reference 1" (H1- = 3) is on.
0.00
Hz
281
97
d1-03 Frequency
<1> Reference 3
Frequency reference when digital input "Multi-Step

Speed Reference 2 (H1- = 4) is on.
0.00
Hz
282
97
d1-04 Frequency
<1> Reference 4
Frequency reference when digital inputs "Multi-Step

Speed Reference 1, 2" (H1- = 3 and 4) are on.
0.00
Hz
283
97
d1-05 Frequency
<1> Reference 5
0.00
Hz
284
d1-06 Frequency
<1> Reference 6
Frequency reference when digital input "Multi-Step 0.00 to

400.00
Speed Reference 3" (H1- = 5) is on.
Hz
Frequency reference when digital inputs "Multi-Step <2>
Speed Reference 1, 3 " (H1- = 3 and 5) are on.
0.00
Hz
285
d1-07 Frequency
<1> Reference 7
Frequency reference when digital inputs "Multi-Step

Speed Reference 2, 3" (H1- = 4 and 5) are on.
0.00
Hz
286
d1-08 Frequency
<1> Reference 8
Frequency reference when multi-function input

"Multi-Step speed reference 1, 2, 3" (H1- = 3, 4,
5) are on.
0.00
Hz
287
6.00
Hz
292
reference when digital inputs "Jog

d1-17 Jog Frequency Frequency
Frequency Reference", "Forward Jog" or "Reverse
<1> Reference
Jog." are on.
d2: Frequency Upper and Lower Limits

Use d2 parameters to configure the frequency reference limits.
d2-01 Frequency
Reference
Upper Limit
Sets the frequency reference upper limit as a

percentage of maximum output frequency (E1-04).
Output speed is limited to this value even if the
frequency reference is higher. This limit applies to all
frequency reference sources.
0.0 to
110.0
100.
0%
289
d2-02 Frequency
Reference
Lower Limit
Sets the frequency reference lower limit as a

percentage of maximum output frequency (E1-04).
Output speed is limited to this value even if the
frequency reference is lower. This limit applies to all
frequency reference sources.
0.0 to
110.0
0.0%
28A
d3: Jump Frequency

Use d3 parameters to configure the drive Jump Frequency settings.
220
B.2 Parameter Table

No.
Name
d3-01 Jump
Frequency 1
d3-02 Jump
Frequency 2
d3-04 Jump
Frequency
Width
Description

Hex Pg.
d3-01 to d3-04 allow programming of three

prohibited frequency reference points for eliminating
problems with resonant vibration of the motor/
machine. This feature does not eliminate the selected
frequency values, but accelerates and decelerates the
motor through the prohibited bandwidth.
The parameters must be according to the rule
d3-01 d3-02 .
0.0 to
400.0
This parameter sets the dead-band width around each

selected prohibited frequency reference point. The
bandwidth becomes the designated Jump frequency,
plus or minus d3-04.
0.0 to
20.0
0.0
Hz
294
0.0
Hz
295
1.0
Hz
297
298
d4: Frequency Reference Hold

Use d4 parameters to configure the drive frequency reference hold function.
Determines if the frequency reference or frequency
reference bias is saved when the Run command is
removed or the power goes off.
Frequency
0: Disabled
d4-01 Reference
Hold Function 1: Enabled
This parameter is effective when the multi-function
Selection
inputs Accel/Decel Ramp Hold or Up/Down
commands are selected (H1- = A or 10/11).

Range upper limit is dependent on parameters E1-04, Maximum Output Frequency, and d2-01, Frequency
Reference Upper Limit.
Parameter List
<1>
<2>
0, 1
B
221
B.2 Parameter Table
u E: Motor Parameters
E parameters set V/f characteristics and motor-related data.
No.
Name

Hex Pg.
Description
E1: V/f Pattern Characteristics

Use E1 parameters to set V/f characteristics for the motor.
This parameter must be set to the power supply
voltage.
WARNING! Drive input voltage (not motor voltage)
E1-01 Input Voltage must be set in E1-01 for the protective features of the
<1> Setting
drive to function properly. Failure to do so may result
in equipment damage and/or death or personal
injury.
155 to
255
230
300
101
302
40.0 to
400.0
60
Hz
303
101
0.0 to
255.0
230
V
304
101
0.0 to
E1-04
60
Hz
305
101
0.0 to
E1-04
3.0
Hz
306
101
0.0 to
255.0
18.4
V
307
101
0.0 to
E1-04
1.5
Hz
308
101
0.0 to
255.0
13.8
V
309
101
E2-01 Motor Rated

Current
Sets the motor nameplate full load current in

10 to
amperes.
200% of
Note: Set E2-03 (Motor No-Load Current) before
drive
<2>
making changes to E2-01. Setting E2-01 < E2-03 will rated
trigger an oPE02 error.
current
30E
104
E2-02 Motor Rated

Slip
Sets the motor rated slip in Hertz.
30F
104
E1-03 V/f Pattern

Selection
E1-04 Maximum
Output
Frequency
E1-05 Maximum
<1> Output
Voltage
E1-06 Base
Frequency
E1-07 Middle
Output
Frequency
Middle
E1-08 Output
<1> Frequency
Voltage
E1-09 Minimum
Output
Frequency
Minimum
E1-10 Output
<1> Frequency
Voltage
F: Custom V/f. E1-04 through E1-10 settings define

the V/f pattern.
E1-04, E1-06 to E1-10 can only be changed when

E1-03 is set to F.
To set linear V/f characteristics, set the same values
for E1-07 and E1-09. In this case, the setting for
E1-08 will be disregarded.
Ensure that the four frequencies are set according to
these rules to prevent triggering an oPE10 fault:
E1-09 E1-07 < E1-06 E1-04
VACrms Out (V)
E1-05
E1-08
E1-10
E1-09
E1-07 E1-06
Frequency (Hz)
E1-04
E2: Motor Parameters

Use E2 parameters to set motor-related data.
222
0.00 to
20.00
<2>
B.2 Parameter Table

No.
Name
Description

Hex Pg.
E2-03 Motor
No-Load
Current
Sets the magnetizing current of the motor in amperes.

0 to less
Note: Set E2-03 (Motor No-Load Current) before
<2>
making changes to E2-01. Setting E2-01 < E2-03 will than
E2-01
trigger an oPE02 error.
310
104
Motor
E2-05 Line-to-Line
Resistance
Sets the phase-to-phase motor resistance in ohms.
0.000 to
65.000 <2>
<3>
312
<1>
<2>
<3>
Values shown here are for 200 V class drives. Double the value when using a 400 V class drive.
Default setting value is dependent on parameter o2-04, Drive Model Selection and C6-01, Drive Duty Selection.
Setting range becomes 0.00 to 130.00 for drives 0.2 kW and smaller.
u H Parameters: Multi-Function Terminals

H parameters assign functions to the multi-function input and output terminals.
No.
Name
Description

Hex Pg.
H1: Multi-Function Digital Input

H1 parameters to assign functions to the multi-function digital input terminals. Unused terminals should be set to "F".
Multi-Function Digital
H1-01 Input Terminal S1
Function Selection
Function Selection
Function Selection
Assigns a function to the multi-function

digital inputs.
Refer to H1 Multi-Function Digital Input
Selections on page 224 for a description
of setting values.
0 to 67
Function Selection
<1>
438
41
439
24
400
14
401
3 (0)
<1>
402
Parameter List
Function Selection
40
1 to 67
Parenthetical value is the default when parameter A1-03 = 3330 3-Wire Initialization.
B
223
B.2 Parameter Table

H1 Multi-Function Digital Input Selections
H1-
Setting
224
Function
Description
Page
3-Wire Sequence
Closed: Reverse rotation (only if the drive is set up for 3-Wire

sequence)
LOCAL/REMOTE Selection
Open: REMOTE, Run and frequency reference source set in

b1-01/02
Closed: LOCAL, LED operator is run and reference source
Serial Communication
Reference Selection
Open: REMOTE, Run and frequency reference source set in

b1-01/02
Closed: MEMOBUS/Modbus Communication
Multi-Step Speed Reference 2 Used to select Multi-Step Speeds set in d1-01 to d1-08
Jog Reference Selection
Open: Selected speed reference

Closed: Jog Frequency reference (d1-17). Jog has priority over
all other reference sources.
Accel/Decel Time 1
Used to switch between Accel/Decel Time 1 and 2
Baseblock Command (N.O.)
Open: Normal operation

Closed: No drive output
Baseblock Command (N.C.)
Open: No drive output

Closed: Normal operation
Accel/Decel Ramp Hold
Closed: The drive pauses during acceleration or deceleration

and maintains the output frequency.
Not used
Select this setting when not using the terminal or when using
the terminal in a pass-through mode.
10
Up Command
11
Down Command
Open: Maintains the current frequency reference

Closed: Increases or decreases the current frequency reference.
Ensure that the increase and decrease commands are set in
conjunction with one another.
14
Fault Reset
Closed: Resets faults if the cause is cleared and the Run

command is removed.
15
Fast-Stop (N.O.)
Closed: Decelerates at the Fast-Stop time C1-09.

To restart the Fast-Stop input must be released and Run must
be cycled.
17
Fast-stop (N.C.)
Open: Decelerates according to C1-09 (Fast-stop Time)
B.2 Parameter Table

H1 Multi-Function Digital Input Selections
H1-
Setting
Function
Description
20 to 2F External Fault
Page
20: N.O., Always Detected, Ramp To Stop

21: N.C., Always Detected, Ramp To Stop
22: N.O., During Run, Ramp To Stop
23: N.C., During Run, Ramp To Stop
24: N.O., Always Detected, Coast To Stop
25: N.C., Always Detected, Coast To Stop
26: N.O., During Run, Coast To Stop
27: N.C., During Run, Coast To Stop
28: N.O., Always Detected, Fast-stop
29: N.C., Always Detected, Fast-stop
2A: N.O., During Run, Fast-stop
2B: N.C., During Run, Fast-stop
2C: N.O., Always Detected, Alarm Only (continue running)
2D: N.C., Always Detected, Alarm Only (continue running)
2E: N.O., During Run, Alarm Only (continue running)
2F: N.C., During Run, Alarm Only (continue running)
40
Forward Run Command

(2-Wire sequence)
Open: Stop
Closed: Forward run
41
Reverse Run Command

(2-Wire sequence)
Open: Stop
Closed: Reverse run
61
Closed: Activates Current Detection Speed Search from the

max. output frequency (E1-04)
62
Closed: Activates Current Detection Speed Search from the

frequency reference
67
Communications Test Mode
Tests the MEMOBUS/Modbus RS-422/485 interface.
No.
Name

Hex Pg.
Description
H2: Multi-Function Digital Output MA-MB-MC

Use H2 parameters to assign functions to the multi-function digital output MA-MB-MC.
Terminal MA,
MB and MC Refer to H2 Multi-Function Digital Output Settings
H2-01 Function
0 to 13D
on page 225 for a description of setting values.
Selection
(relay)
40B
105
Function
Description
Page
During Run
Closed: A Run command is active or voltage is output
Zero Speed
Closed: Output frequency is 0
Speed Agree 1
Closed: Output frequency equals the speed reference (plus or

minus 2 Hz hysteresis)
Frequency Detection 1
Closed: Output frequency is less than or equal to the value in

L4-01 with 2 Hz hysteresis
Parameter List
H2 Multi-Function Digital Output Settings

H2-01
Setting
B
225
B.2 Parameter Table

H2 Multi-Function Digital Output Settings
H2-01
Setting
Function
Description
Page
Frequency Detection 2
Closed: Output frequency is greater than the value in L4-01

with 2 Hz hysteresis
Drive Ready
Closed: Drive Ready. The drive is powered up, not in a fault

state, and in the Drive mode
DC Bus Undervoltage
Closed: DC bus voltage is below the Uv trip level
During Baseblock (N.O.)
Closed: There is no output voltage
Torque Detection 1 (N.O.)
Closed: Output current/torque exceeds the torque value set in

parameter L6-02 for longer than the time set in parameter L6-03
Fault
Closed: Fault occurred (other than CPF00 and CPF01)
Not used
Set this value when the terminal is not used, or when using the
terminal in the pass-through mode
10
Minor Fault
Closed: An alarm is triggered
17
Torque Detection 1 (N.C.)
Open: When the output current exceeds the value set in

parameter L6-02 for more time than is set in parameter L6-03
1A
Reverse Direction
Closed: Drive is running in the reverse direction
1E
Restart Enabled
Closed: An automatic restart is performed
3C
LOCAL/REMOTE Status
Closed: LOCAL
Open: REMOTE
3D
Speed Search
Closed: Speed search is being executed
Reverse the output switching of the multi-function output

functions. Set the last two digits of 1 to reverse the output
signal of that specific function
Examples:
Setting 108 reverses the output of During baseblock, which
is setting value 08
Setting 13C reverses the output of LOCAL/REMOTE
Status, which is setting 3C
100 to
102;
104 to H2 Parameter Functions
108;
Output Switching
10B, 10E, Reversed
110, 117, of 0 to 13D
11A, 11E,
13C, 13D
No.
Name
Description

Hex Pg.
H3: Analog Input A1

Use H3 parameters to set the analog input terminal A1.
Terminal A1
H3-01 Signal Level
Selection
Sets the input level for terminal A1.

0: 0 to +10 V (lower limit)
1: 0 to +10 V (no lower limit)
2: 4 to 20 mA
3: 0 to 20 mA
H3-03 Terminal A1
<1> Gain Setting
H3-04 Terminal A1
<1> Bias Setting
226
0 to 3
410
Sets the level of the input value when 10 V (20 mA) -999.9 100.
is input at terminal A1.
to 999.9 0%
411
Sets the level of the input value when 0 V (0 or 4 mA) -999.9

is input at terminal A1.
to 999.9
412
0.0
%
B.2 Parameter Table

No.
Name
Analog Input
H3-13 Filter Time
Constant
<1>
No.
Description
Sets the primary delay filter time constant for
terminal A1 or potentiometer (optional). Used for
noise filtering.

Hex Pg.
0.00 to
2.00
0.03
s
41B

Name
Description

Hex Pg.
H4: Multi-Function Analog Output AM

Use H4 parameters to configure the multi-function analog output terminal AM.
MultiFunction
H4-01 Analog
Output
Terminal
AM
Selects the data to be output through multi-function

analog output terminal AM.
Set the desired monitor parameter to the digits
available in U-. For example, enter 103 for
U1-03.
When using this terminal in through mode or when
not using it at all, set 000 or 031.
000 to
999
102
41D
105
MultiFunction
Sets terminal AM output level when selected
H4-02 Analog
monitor is at 100%.
<1> Output
Terminal AM Maximum output voltage is 10 V.
Gain
-999.9 100.0
to 999.9 %
41E
105
MultiFunction
H4-03 Analog
Sets terminal AM output level when selected
<1> Output
monitor is at 0%.
Terminal AM
Bias
-999.9
to 999.9 0.0%
41F
105
H5-01 Drive Slave

<2>
Address
Selects drive slave number (address) for

MEMOBUS/Modbus communication. Cycle power 0 to FF
for the setting to take effect.
1F
425
Selects the baud rate for MEMOBUS/Modbus

communication. Cycle power for the setting to take
effect.
bps
Speed 01 :: 1200
H5-02 Comm.
2400 bps
Selection
2 : 4800 bps
3 : 9600 bps
4 : 19200 bps
5 : 38400 bps
0 to 5
426
Selects the communication parity for MEMOBUS/

Modbus communication. Cycle power for the setting
Parity to take effect.
H5-03 Comm.
Selection
0: No parity
1: Even parity
2: Odd parity
0 to 2
427
Parameter List
H5: MEMOBUS/Modbus Communications

Use H5 Parameters to connect the drive to a MEMOBUS/Modbus network.
The settings for MEMOBUS/Modbus communications become effective when the drive is restarted.
B
227
B.2 Parameter Table

No.
Name
Description

Hex Pg.
Stopping
H5-04 Method After
Comm. Error
Selects the stopping method when a communication

time-out fault (CE) is detected.
0: Ramp to stop
1: Coast to stop
2: Fast-stop
3: Alarm only
0 to 3
428
Comm. Fault
H5-05 Detection
Selection
Enables or disables the communications timeout

fault (CE).
0: Disabled - A communication loss will not cause a
communication fault.
1: Enabled - If communication is lost for more than
2 seconds, a CE fault will occur.
0, 1
429
10 to 65
10
ms
42A
Drive
the wait time between receiving and sending
H5-06 Transmit Wait Set
data.
Time
Control
H5-07 RTS
Selection
Selects "request to send" (RTS) control:

0: Disabled - RTS is always on.
1: Enabled - RTS turns on only when sending.
0, 1
42B
Run
H5-12 Command
Method
Selection
0: FWD/STOP, REV/STOP Method

1: RUN/STOP, FWD/REV Method
0, 1
43D
MEMOBUS
Freq.
H5-13 Reference and
Freq. Monitor
Unit
0: 0.1 Hz/1
1: o1-03 based
2: 100%/30000
3: 0.1%/1
0 to 3
43E
<1>
<2>

If this parameter is set to 0, the drive will be unable to respond to MEMOBUS/Modbus commands.
Note:
228
Cycle power to the drive to enable MEMOBUS/Modbus settings.
B.2 Parameter Table
u L: Protection Function
L parameters provide protection to the drive and motor, such as: control during momentary
power loss, Stall Prevention, frequency detection, fault restarts, overtorque detection, and
other types of hardware protection.
No.
Name
Description

Hex Pg.
L1: Motor Protection Functions

Use L1 parameters to configure motor protective functions.
Motor
L1-01 Overload
Protection
Selection
Sets the motor thermal overload protection (oL1)

based on the cooling capacity of the motor.
0: Disabled
1: General Purpose Motor (Standard Fan-Cooled)
2: Drive Dedicated Motor with a Speed Range of 1:10
NOTICE: When multiple motors are used the drive
may not be able to provide protection, even if it is
enabled in L1-01. Set L1-01 to 0 and ensure each
motor has a thermal relay installed.
0 to 2
480
107
Motor
L1-02 Overload
Protection
Time
Sets the motor thermal overload protection (oL1)

time.
A larger L1-02 time will increase the time for an oL1
fault to occur.
This parameter does not typically require adjustment.
Should be set in accordance with the overload
tolerance of the motor.
0.1 to
20.0
8.0
min
481
107
Determines whether or not to hold the electrothermal

value when the power supply is interrupted.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0, 1
46D
485
Continuous
L1-13 Electrothermal
Operation
Selection
Momentary
L2-01 Power Loss
Operation
Selection
Enables and disables the momentary power loss

function.
0: Disabled - Drive trips on (Uv1) fault when power
is lost.
1: Power Loss Ride-Thru Time - Drive will restart if
power returns within the Power Loss Ride-Thru
Time.
2: CPU Power Active - Drive will restart if power
returns as long as the CPU is working.
0 to 2
Parameter List
L2: Momentary Power Loss

Use L2 parameters to configure drive functions for momentary power loss conditions.
L3: Stall Prevention Function

Use L3 parameters to configure the Stall Prevention function.
B
229
B.2 Parameter Table

No.
Name
Description
Stall
L3-01 Prevention
Selection
during
Acceleration
Selects the Stall Prevention method used to prevent

excessive current during acceleration.
0: Disabled - Motor accelerates at active acceleration
rate. The motor may stall if load is too heavy or accel
time is too short.
1: General Purpose - When output current exceeds
L3-02 level, acceleration stops. Acceleration will
continue when the output current level falls below the
L3-02 level.
Stall
L3-02 Prevention
Level during
Acceleration

Hex Pg.
0, 1
<1>
48F
Used when L3-01 = 1.

100% is equal to the drive rated current.
0 to 150 <2>
Decrease the set value if stalling or excessive current <4>
<4>
occurs with default setting.
490
Stall
L3-04 Prevention
Selection
during
Deceleration
When using a braking resistor, use setting "0".

0: Disabled - The drive decelerates at the active
deceleration rate. If the load is too large or the
deceleration time is too short, an ov fault may occur.
1: General Purpose - The drive decelerates at the
active deceleration rate, but if the main circuit DC bus
voltage reaches the Stall Prevention level,
deceleration will stop. Deceleration will continue
once the DC bus level drops below the Stall
Prevention level.
4: Overexcitation Deceleration - Decelerates with the
flux level determined by n3-13 (Overexcitation
Gain).
0, 1, 4
492
Stall
L3-05 Prevention
Selection
during Run
Selects the Stall Prevention method to use to prevent

drive faults during run.
0: Disabled - Drive runs a set frequency. A heavy load
may cause the drive to trip on an oC or oL fault.
1: Decel Time 1 - The drive will decelerate at Decel
Time 1 (C1-02) if the output current exceeds the level
set by L3-06. Once the current level drops below the
L3-06 level, the drive will accelerate back to its
frequency reference at the active acceleration rate.
2: Decel Time 2 - Same as setting 1 except the drive
decelerates at Decel Time 2 (C1-04).
When output frequency is 6 Hz or less, Stall
Prevention during run is disabled regardless of the
setting in L3-05.
0 to 2
493
Stall
L3-06 Prevention
Level during
Run
Enabled when L3-05 is set to "1" or "2". 100% is

equal to the drive rated current.
Decrease the set value if stalling or excessive current
occurs with the default settings.
Upper level is determined by C6-01 and L8-38.
30 to
150
<4>
<2>
<4>
494
499
L4: Frequency Detection

Use L4 parameters to configure frequency detection operation.
Speed
L4-01 Agreement
Detection
Level
230
These parameters configure the multi-function output

(H2- 01 = 2, 4, 5) settings "Speed Agree 1",
"Frequency Detection 1," and "Frequency detection
2".
0.0 to
400.0
0.0
Hz
B.2 Parameter Table

No.
Name
Speed
L4-07 Agreement
Detection
Selection
Description
0: No detection during baseblock.
1: Detection always enabled.

Hex Pg.
0, 1
470
49E
4A1
L5: Fault Reset

Use L5 parameters to configure Automatic Restart after fault.
of
L5-01 Number
Auto Restart
Attempts
Sets the counter for the number of times the drive

attempts to restart when one of the following faults
occurs: oC, oH1, ov, PF, rH, oL1, oL2, oL3, Uv1.
0 to 10
When the drive operates without fault for 10 minutes,
the counter will be reset.
L6: Overtorque Detection
Use L6 parameters to configure overtorque detection.
L6-01 Torque
Detection
Selection 1
Selects the overtorque operation. Overtorque is

determined by the settings in parameters L6-02 and
L6-03. The multi-function output settings (H2- 01=
B and 17) are also active if programmed.
0: Disabled
1: oL3 at Speed Agree - Alarm (overtorque detection
only active during Speed Agree and operation
continues after detection).
2: oL3 at RUN - Alarm (overtorque detection is
always active and operation continues after
detection).
3: oL3 at Speed Agree - Fault (overtorque detection
only active during Speed Agree and drive output will
shut down on an oL3 fault).
4: oL3 at RUN - Fault (overtorque detection is always
active and drive output will shut down on an oL3
fault).
L6-02 Torque
Detection
Level 1
Sets the overtorque detection level. 100% is equal to 0 to 300

the motor rated current.
150
%
4A2
L6-03 Torque
Detection
Time 1
Sets the length of time an overtorque condition must

exist before Torque Detection is triggered.
0.1 s
4A3
4AD
0 to 4
0.0 to
10.0
Internal
Dynamic
L8-01 Braking
Resistor
Protection
Selection
(ERF type)
Selects the Braking resistor when using a 3% duty

cycle heatsink mounted braking resistor. This
parameter does not enable or disable the braking
transistor of the drive.
0: Resistor overheat protection disabled
1: Resistor overheat protection enabled
0, 1
Parameter List
L8: Hardware Protection

Use L8 parameters to configure hardware protection functions.
B
231
B.2 Parameter Table

No.
Name

Hex Pg.
Description
Input Phase
L8-05 Loss
Protection
Selection
Selects the detection of input current phase loss,

power supply voltage imbalance, or main circuit
electrolytic capacitor deterioration.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Note: This parameter is disabled in 200 V singlephase drives.
0, 1
4B1
Heatsink
L8-10 Cooling Fan
Operation
Selection
Controls the heatsink cooling fan operation.

0: Run with timer (Fan operates only during run and
for 60 seconds after stop.)
1: Run always (Cooling fan operates whenever the
drive is powered up.)
0, 1
4B6
L8-12 Ambient
Temperature
Setting
Used to input the ambient temperature. This value

adjusts the drive oL2 detection level.
-10 to
50
30 C
4B8
Current
L8-18 Soft
Limit
Selection
Selects the software current limit function. Typically

no adjustment is required.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0, 1
4BE
Installation
L8-35 Method
<3> Selection
Selects the installation type:

0: IP20/IP00 Drive
1: Side-by-Side Mounting
2: NEMA Type 1 Drive
3: Finless Drive or External Heatsink Installation
0 to 3
4EC
0 to 2
4EF
Provides protection to the IGBTs by reducing the

carrier frequency at low speeds.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled below 6 Hz
2: Enabled for the whole speed range
L8-38 Carrier
Frequency
Reduction
Current
ND
HD
200 V Single Phase
80% of HD
400 V: 60% of HD
0
<1>
<2>
<3>
<4>
232
C6-02
Carrier Frequency
2
10 (8)
15
When enabled, the drive stops accelerating when it exceeds the value of L3-02, Stall Prevention Level. The drive
decelerates after 100 ms and begins accelerating again after restoring the current level.
Default setting value is 120% when C6-01 is set to 1 (ND) and 150% when C6-01 is set to 0 (HD).
This parameter is not reset to the default value when the drive is reinitialized using A1-03.
The default setting and the upper limit of the setting range are determined by C6-01, Drive Duty Mode, and
L8-38, Carrier Frequency Reduction Selection.
B.2 Parameter Table
u n: Advanced Performance Set-Up

The n parameters are used to adjust more advanced performance characteristics.
No.
Name
Description

Hex Pg.
n1: Hunting Prevention

Use n1 parameters to configure hunting prevention operation.
n1-02 Hunting
Prevention
Gain Setting
Sets the gain for the Hunting Prevention Function.

If the motor vibrates while lightly loaded, increase the
0.00 to
gain by 0.1 until vibration ceases.
2.50
If the motor stalls, decrease the gain by 0.1 until the
stalling ceases.
1.00
581
531
n3: Overexcitation Braking

Use n3 parameters to configure the overexcitation braking function.
Overexcitation
n3-13 Deceleration
Gain
Applies a gain to the V/f pattern during deceleration

(L3-04 = 4). Returns to normal values after ramp to
stop or at re-acceleration.
To increase the braking power of overexcitation,
increase the gain by 1.25 to 1.30.
1.00 to
1.40
1.10
u o: Operator Related Parameters

o parameters are used to set up the LED digital operator displays.
No.
Name
Description

Hex Pg.
User Monitor
o1-02 Selection
<1> After Power
Up
Selects the information displayed when power is

applied.
1: Frequency Reference (U1-01)
2: Forward/Reverse
3: Output Frequency (U1-02)
4: Output Current (U1-03)
Digital
o1-03 Operator
Display
Selection
Sets the units to display the frequency reference and

output frequency.
0: 0.01 Hz
1: 0.01% (100% = E1-04)
1 to 4
501
0, 1
502
506
o2: Operator Keypad Functions

Use o2 parameters to configure LED digital operator key functions.
Key
o2-02 STOP
Function
Selection
Determines if the STOP key on the digital operator

will stop the drive when operating from the external
terminals or via serial communication.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0, 1
Parameter List
o1: Display Settings

Use o1 parameters to configure the digital operator display.
B
233
B.2 Parameter Table

No.
Name
Description

Hex Pg.
o2-04 Drive Model

Selection
dep.
Sets the drive model.
This parameter only needs to be set when installing a 0 to FF on
drive
new control board. Do not change for other reason.
spec.
508
Frequency
o2-05 Reference
Setting
Method
Selection
Selects if the ENTER key must be pressed when

inputting the frequency reference by the operator
keypad.
0: Data/Enter key must be pressed to enter a frequency
reference.
1: Data/Enter key is not required.
The output frequency changes immediately when the
reference is changed by the UP or DOWN keys on the
digital operator. The ENTER key does not need to be
pressed.
Note: When o2-05 is set to 1, the power supply to the
drive must remain on for at least 5 seconds after
making changes to the frequency reference.
0, 1
509
Operation
Selection
o2-06 when Digital
Operator is
Disconnected
Sets drive action when the digital operator is removed

in LOCAL mode or with b1-02 = 0 (valid for optional
remote operator only).
0: The drive will continue operation
1: The drive will trigger a fault (oPr) and the motor
will coast to stop
0, 1
50A
o2-09
Factory use.
o3: Copy Function

Use o3 parameters to Read, Copy and Verify the parameter settings to and from the drive.
Copy
o3-01 Function
Selection
0: Copy select
1: INV OP READ (Read parameters from the
drive, saving them onto the digital operator.)
2: OP INV WRITE (Copy parameters from the
digital operator, writing them to the drive.)
3: OP INV VERIFY (Verify parameter settings on
the drive to check if they match the data saved on the
operator.)
To read the drive parameter settings into the digital
operator, set o3-02 to 1 (to allow reading).
Copy
o3-02 Allowed
Selection
Locks the READ operation to prevent accidental

overwriting of the data stored in the LED operator.
0: READ operation prohibited
1: READ operation allowed
0 to 3
515
0, 1
516
o4: Maintenance Period

Use o4 parameters to perform maintenance.
o4-01 Accumulated
Operation
Time Setting
Sets the value for the cumulative operation time of the

drive in units of 10 h.
0 to
9999
50B
Accumulated
o4-02 Operation
Time
Selection
Determines, how the cumulative operation time

(U4-01) is counted.
0: Logs power-on time
1: Logs operation time when the drive output is active
(output operation time).
0, 1
50C
234
B.2 Parameter Table

No.
Name

Hex Pg.
Description
Fan
o4-03 Cooling
Operation
Time Setting
Sets the value of the fan operation time in units of 10

h.
o4-05 Capacitor
Maintenance
Setting
Sets the value of the capacitor maintenance time

monitor U4-05.
0 to
9999
50E
0 to 150
0%
51D
DC Bus Preo4-07 Charge Relay Sets the value of the Soft Charge Bypass Relay
Maintenance Maintenance monitor U4-06.
Setting
0 to 150
0%
523
o4-09 IGBT
Maintenance
Setting
Sets the value of the IGBT Maintenance monitor

U4-07.
0 to 150
0%
525
o4-11 U2
Initialization
0: U2- monitor data are not reset when the drive

is initialized using A1-03.
1: U2- monitor data are reset when the drive is
initialized using A1-03. (The value of o4-11 is
automatically returned to 0.)
0, 1
510
<1>
u U: Monitors
Monitor parameters allow the user to view drive status, fault information, and other
information about drive operation.
No.
Name
Description
Analog Output Unit

Level
Mode
Addr.
Hex
U1-01 Frequency
Reference
Monitors the frequency reference
10 V: Max
frequency
0.01
Hz
40
U1-02 Output
Frequency
Displays the output frequency. Display units are 10 V: Max

determined by o1-03.
frequency
0.01
Hz
41
42
U1-03 Output
Current
Displays the output current.
10 V: Drive rated
current
0.01
A
<1>
Output
U1-06 Voltage
Reference
Displays the output voltage.
10 V: 200 Vrms
(400 Vrms)
0.1 V
45
Bus
U1-07 DC
Voltage
Displays the DC bus voltage.
10 V: 400 V (800
V)
1V
46
Parameter List
U1: Operation Status Monitors

Use U1 monitors to display the operation status of the drive.
B
235
B.2 Parameter Table

No.
Name
Description
Analog Output Unit

Level
Mode
Addr.
Hex
Displays the input terminal status.
Digital input terminal

S1 enabled
S2 enabled
Input
U1-10 Terminal
Status
No output signal
available
49
No output signal
available
4A
0.1%
4E
No output signal
available
66
No. ROM ID
U1-25 Software
(ROM)
No signal output
avail.
4D
No. Flash ID
U1-26 Software
(Flash)
No signal output
avail.
5B

S3 enabled
S4 enabled
S5 enabled
Displays the output terminal status.

Output
U1-11 Terminal
Status
U1-13 Terminal
Input Level
Multi-Function
Digital Output (fault)
(terminal MA/MB-MC)
Displays analog input A1 level: 100% when

input is 10 V or 20 mA.
10 V/20 mA:
100%
Displays the contents of a MEMOBUS/Modbus

error.
CRC Error
Data Length Error
MEMOBUS/
U1-19 Modbus Error
Code
Not Used
Parity Error
Overrun Error
Framing Error
Timed Out
Not Used
236
B.2 Parameter Table

No.
Name
Description
Analog Output Unit

Level
Mode
Addr.
Hex
U2: Fault History

Use U2 monitors to view fault history data.
U2-01 Current Fault Displays the current fault.
No signal output
avail.
80
U2-02 Previous
Fault
No signal output
avail.
81
1h
4C
Displays the previous fault. o4-11 resets the

values for U2-02
Displays the cumulative operation time of the

drive. The value for the cumulative operation
time counter can be reset in parameter o4-01.
U4-01 Accumulated
Use parameter o4-02 to determine if the
No signal output
Operation
<3> Time
operation time should start as soon as the power avail.
is switched on or only while the run command
is present. The maximum number displayed is
99999, after which the value is reset to 0.
Fan
U4-04 Cooling
Maintenance
Displays main cooling fan usage time as a

percentage of the expected performance life.
Parameter o4-03 can be used to reset this
monitor.
No signal output
avail.
1%
7E
U4-05 Capacitor
<2> Maintenance
Displays main circuit capacitor usage time as a

percentage of the expected performance life.
No signal output
Parameter o4-05 can be used to reset this
avail.
monitor.
1%
7C
U4-06 Soft Charge

<2> Bypass Relay
Maintenance
Displays the soft charge bypass relay

maintenance time as a percentage of the
No signal output
estimated product life. Parameter o4-07 can be avail.
used to reset this monitor.
1%
7D6
U4-07 IGBT
<2> Maintenance
Displays IGBT usage time as a percentage of

expected performance life. Parameter o4-09 can No signal output
avail.
be used to reset this monitor.
1%
7D7
U4-08 Heatsink
Temperature
Displays the heatsink temperature.
1 C
68
U4-09 LED Check
Lights all segments of the LED to verify that the No signal output
display is working properly.
avail.
3C
Hold
U4-13 Peak
Current
Displays the peak hold current during run.
0.01
A
<1>
7CF
<1>
<2>
<3>
10 V: 100 C
No signal output
avail.
U1-03 and U4-13 display monitor contents in amp units. When reading the value of these monitors via
MEMOBUS/Modbus, a value of 8192 is equal to 100% of the drive rated output current.
When this value reaches 100%, the maintenance period has been reached for the component in question and the
drive is at risk of faulting out due to component failure. Periodically check the maintenance monitors to avoid
this situation.
MEMOBUS/Modbus communications data is in 10 h units. If data in 1 h units are also required, refer to register
0099H.
237
Parameter List
U4: Maintenance Monitors

Use U4 monitors to display drive maintenance information.
B.3 Defaults by Drive Model and Duty Rating ND/HD
B.3
Defaults by Drive Model and Duty Rating

ND/HD
Table B.2 Single-Phase, 200 V Class Drives Default Settings by Drive Capacity and ND/HD Settings
No.
Description
Unit
Model
BA0001
BA0002
o2-04
Drive Model Selection
Hex
30
31
C6-01
Normal/Heavy Duty
Motor rated power
kW
Default Settings
BA0003
32
HD
ND
HD
ND
HD
ND
1
0.1
0.18
0.25
0.37
0.55
0.75
C6-02
Carrier frequency
E2-01
Motor rated current
0.60
1.10
1.10
1.90
1.90
3.30
E2-02
Motor rated slip
Hz
2.50
2.60
2.60
2.90
2.90
2.50
E2-03
Motor no-load current
0.40
0.80
0.80
1.20
1.20
1.80
E2-05
Motor line-to-line resistance
35.98
20.56
20.56
9.84
9.842
5.156
Momentary power loss ridethrough time
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
Mom. power loss Baseblock

time
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.3
No.
Description
Unit
Model
BA0006
o2-04
Hex
33
C6-01
238
Normal/Heavy Duty
Default Settings
BA0010
34
HD
ND
HD
ND
C6-02
Carrier frequency
E2-01
Motor rated current
3.30
6.20
6.20
8.50
E2-02
Motor rated slip
Hz
2.50
2.60
2.60
2.90
E2-03
1.80
2.80
2.80
3.00
E2-05
5.156
1.997
1.997
1.601
Momentary power loss ride-through time
0.2
0.2
0.3
0.3
Momentary power loss Baseblock time
0.3
0.4
0.4
0.5

Table B.3 Three-Phase, 200 V Class Drives Default Settings by Drive Capacity and ND/HD Setting
No.
Description
Unit
Model
2A0001
2A0002
2A0004
2A0006
o2-04
Hex
60
61
62
63
C6-01
Normal/Heavy Duty
Motor rated power
Default Settings
kW
2A0010
65
HD
ND
HD
ND
HD
ND
HD
ND
HD
1.1
1.1
1.5
2.2
0.1
0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75
ND
C6-02
Carrier frequency
E2-01
Motor rated current
0.60
1.10
1.10
1.90
1.90
3.30
3.30
4.90
6.20
8.50
E2-02
Motor rated slip
Hz
2.50
2.60
2.60
2.90
2.90
2.50
2.50
2.60
2.60
2.90
E2-03
0.40
0.80
0.80
1.20
1.20
1.80
1.80
2.30
2.80
3.00
E2-05
Motor line-to-line
resistance
35.98 20.56 20.56
9.84
9.842 5.156 5.156 3.577 1.997 1.601
Momentary power loss

ride-through time
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.2
0.2
0.3
0.3

Baseblock time
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.3
0.3
0.4
0.4
0.5
Description
Unit
Model
2A0012
o2-04
Hex
66
C6-01
Normal/Heavy Duty
Motor rated power
kW
Default Settings
2A0020
68
HD
ND
HD
ND
1
2.2
3.0
4.0
5.5
C6-02
Carrier frequency
E2-01
Motor rated current
8.50
11.40
14.0
19.60
E2-02
Motor rated slip
Hz
2.90
2.70
2.73
1.50
E2-03
3.00
3.70
4.50
5.10
E2-05
1.601
1.034
0.771
0.399
0.5
0.5
Momentary power loss Baseblock

time
0.5
0.5
0.6
0.7
Parameter List
No.
B
239

Table B.4 Three-Phase 400 V Class Drives Default Settings by Drive Capacity and ND/HD Setting
No.
Description
Unit
Model
4A0001
4A0002
4A0004
o2-04
Hex
91
92
93
C6-01
Normal/Heavy Duty
Motor rated power
kW
Default Settings
4A0005
94
HD
ND
HD
ND
HD
ND
HD
ND
1
0.37
0.37
0.55
0.75
1.1
1.5
1.5
2.2
C6-02
Carrier frequency
E2-01
Motor rated current
0.60
1.00
1.00
1.60
1.60
3.10
3.10
4.20
E2-02
Motor rated slip
Hz
2.50
2.90
2.90
2.60
2.60
2.50
2.50
3.00
E2-03
0.40
0.60
0.60
0.80
0.80
1.40
1.40
1.50
E2-05
Motor line-to-line
resistance
83.94
38.20
10.1
10.1
6.495

ride-through time
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.2
0.2
0.3
0.3

Baseblock time
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.3
0.3
0.4
0.4
0.5
38.198 22.459 22.459
No.
Description
Unit
Model
4A0007
4A0009
o2-04
95
96
C6-01
Normal/Heavy Duty
Motor rated power
kW
Default Setting
4A0011
97
HD
ND
HD
ND
HD
ND
1
2.2
3.0
3.0
4.0
4.0
5.5
C6-02
Carrier frequency
E2-01
Motor rated current
4.20
5.70
5.70
7.00
7.00
9.80
E2-02
Motor rated slip
Hz
3.00
2.70
2.70
2.70
2.70
1.50
E2-03
1.50
1.90
1.90
2.30
2.30
2.60
E2-05
6.495
4.360
4.360
3.333
3.333
1.595
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5

Baseblock time
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.6
0.6
0.7
240
Appendix: C
Standards
Compliance
This appendix explains the guidelines and criteria for
maintaining CE and UL standards.
C.1 SECTION SAFETY...........................................242

C.2 EUROPEAN STANDARDS...............................245
C.3 UL STANDARDS.............................................254
241
C.1 Section Safety
C.1
Section Safety
DANGER

WARNING
motor case.
safe level.
242
C.1 Section Safety
WARNING
protection.
Fire Hazard

Install adequate branch circuit protection according to applicable local codes and this
manual.
Failure to comply could result in fire and damage to the drive or injury to personnel. The
device is suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 31,000 RMS
symmetrical amperes, 240 Vac maximum (200 V class) and 480 Vac maximum (400 V
class) when protected by branch circuit protection devices specified in this manual.
C
243
C.1 Section Safety
NOTICE
circuit boards.
voltage.
to the drive.
Yaskawa is not responsible for modification of the product made by the user. This product
must not be modified.
and connecting other devices.
244
C.2 European Standards
C.2
European Standards
Figure C.1 CE Mark
The CE mark indicates compliance with European safety and environmental regulations and
is required for engaging in business and commerce in Europe.
European standards include the Machinery Directive for machine manufacturers, the Low
Voltage Directive for electronics manufacturers and the EMC guidelines for controlling noise.
This drive displays the CE mark based on the EMC guidelines and the Low Voltage Directive.
EMC Guidelines: 2004/108/EC
Low Voltage Directive: 2006/95/EC
u CE Low Voltage Directive Compliance

This drive has been tested according to IEC/EN 61800-5-1, and it fully complies with the Low
Voltage Directive.
To comply with the Low Voltage Directive, be sure to meet the following conditions when
combining this drive with other devices:
n Area of Use
Do not use drives in areas with pollution higher than severity 2 and overvoltage category 3 in
accordance with IEC/EN 664.
Yaskawa recommends installing one of the following types of branch circuit protection to
maintain compliance with UL508C. Semiconductor protective type fuses are preferred.
Alternate branch circuit protection devices are also listed in Table C.1.
NOTICE: If a fuse is blown or a Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI) is tripped, check the wiring and the
selection of peripheral devices to identify the cause. Contact Yaskawa before restarting the drive or the
peripheral devices if the cause cannot be identified.
n Factory Recommended Branch Circuit Protection
C
245

Table C.1 Factory Recommended Drive Branch Circuit Protection
Fuse Type
Drive Model
Manufacturer: Bussmann
Model
Fuse Ampere Rating (A)

BA0001
FWH-25A14F
25
BA0002
FWH-25A14F
25
BA0003
FWH-60B
60
BA0006
FWH-80B
80
BA0010
FWH-100B
100
2A0001
FWH-25A14F
25
2A0002
FWH-25A14F
25
2A0004
FWH-25A14F
25
2A0006
FWH-25A14F
25
2A0010
FWH-70B
70
2A0012
FWH-70B
70
2A0020
FWH-90B
90

4A0001
FWH-40B
40
4A0002
FWH-40B
40
4A0004
FWH-50B
50
4A0005
FWH-70B
70
4A0007
FWH-70B
70
4A0009
FWH-90B
90
4A0011
FWH-90B
90
n Grounding
The drive is designed to be used in T-N (grounded neutral point) networks. If installing the
drive in other types of grounded systems, contact your dealer or Yaskawa for instructions.
n CE Standards Compliance for DC Power Supply Input

Install the fuses in the following tables to meet CE standards.
246

DC power supply
(converter)
+
_
Fuse
U/ T1
V/ T2
W/ T3
+1
_
Drive
Fuse
U/ T1
V/ T2
W/ T3
+1
_
Drive
Figure C.2 Example of DC Power Supply Input (Two Drives Connected in Series)
Note:
1. When connecting multiple drives together, make sure that each drive has its own fuse. Replace all
fuses when one fuse blows.
2. Refer to on page 39 for an AC power supply.
3. The recommended fuses and fuse holders are made by Fuji Electric.
Table C.2 Single-Phase 200 V Class Fuses and Fuse Holders
DC Power Supply Input
Fuse
Fuse Holder
Manufacturer: Fuji Electric
Drive Model
Rated Short
Circuit Braking
Current (kA)
Qty.
Type
BA0001
CR6L-20/UL
BA0002
CR6L-30/UL
BA0003
CR6L-50/UL
BA0006
CR6L-75/UL
CMS-5
BA0010
CR6L-100/UL
CMS-5
Qty.
CMS-4
CMS-4
100
CMS-4
Type
C
247

Table C.3 Three-Phase 200 V Class Fuses and Fuse Holders
Fuse
Fuse Holder
Drive Model
Rated Short
Circuit Braking
Current (kA)
Type
Qty.
Type
2A0001
CR6L-20/UL
CMS-4
2A0002
CR6L-20/UL
CMS-4
2A0004
CR6L-20/UL
2A0006
CR6L-30/UL
2A0010
CR6L-50/UL
2A0012
CR6L-50/UL
CMS-4
2A0020
CR6L-75/UL
CMS5
Qty.
CMS-4
100
CMS-4
CMS-4
Table C.4 Three-Phase 400 V Class Fuses and Fuse Holders

Fuse
Fuse Holder
Drive Model
Rated Short
Circuit Braking
Current (kA)
Type
Qty.
Type
4A0001
CR6L-20/UL
CMS-4
4A0002
CR6L-20/UL
CMS-4
4A0004
CR6L-50/UL
4A0005
CR6L-50/UL
4A0007
CR6L-50/UL
CMS-4
4A0009
CR6L-50/UL
CMS-4
4A0011
CR6L-50/UL
CMS-4
Qty.
CMS-4
100
CMS-4
n Guarding Against Harmful Materials

When installing IP20/Open-Chassis enclosure drives, use an enclosure that prevents foreign
material from entering the drive from above or below.
u EMC Guidelines Compliance

This drive is tested according to EN 61800-3:2004/A1:2012 and it complies with the EMC
guidelines.
248
n EMC Filter Installation

The following conditions must be met to ensure continued compliance with guidelines. Refer
to EMC Filters on page 252 for EMC filter selection.
Installation Method
Verify the following installation conditions to ensure that other devices and machinery used
in combination with this drive also comply with EMC guidelines.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Use braided shield cable for the drive and motor wiring or run the wiring through a
metal conduit.
Keep wiring as short as possible. Ground the shield on both the drive side and the
motor side.
Ground the largest possible surface area of the shield to the metal conduit when using
braided shield cable. Yaskawa recommends using a cable clamp.
5.
Install an EMC noise filter to the input side specified by Yaskawa for compliance with
European standards.
Place the drive and EMC noise filter in the same enclosure.
C
249

Three-Phase 200 V / 400 V Class
L3
L2
L1
PE
PE
B
C
E
L3 L2 L1
D
I
A
G
A
B
C
D
Ground the cable shield

Enclosure panel
Metal plate
Grounding surface
(remove any paint or
sealant)
E Drive
F Motor cable (braided

shield cable, max. 20 m)
G Motor
H Cable clamp
I Wiring distance as short
as possible
J EMC noise filter
Figure C.3 EMC Filter and Drive Installation for CE Compliance

(Three-Phase 200 V / 400 V Class)
250

N
L1
PE PE
B
C
E
N L1
J
E
D
I
A
G
Ground the cable shield

Enclosure panel
Metal plate
Grounding surface
(remove any paint or
sealant)
E Drive
F Motor cable (braided

shield cable, max. 20 m)
G Motor
H Cable clamp
I Wiring distance as short
as possible
J EMC noise filter
A
B
C
D
Figure C.4 EMC Filter and Drive Installation for CE Compliance (Single-Phase 200 V
Class)
C
251
n EMC Filters
Install the drive with the EMC filters listed below to comply with the EN 61800-3:2004/
A1:2012, category C1 requirements.
Table C.5 EN 61800-3:2004/A1:2012 Category C1 Filters
Filter Data (Manufacturer: Schaffner)
Drive
Model
Type
BA0001
FS23638-10-07
10
0.97
2.8 x 6.7 x 1.8
2.0 x 6.1
M4
M5
BA0002
FS23638-10-07
10
0.97
2.8 x 6.7 x 1.8
2.0 x 6.1
M4
M5
BA0003
FS23638-10-07
10
0.97
2.8 x 6.7 x 1.8
2.0 x 6.1
M4
M5
BA0006
FS23638-20-07
20
1.65
4.4 x 6.7 x 2.0
3.6 x 6.1
M4
M5
BA0010
FS23638-20-07
20
1.65
4.4 x 6.7 x 2.0
3.6 x 6.1
M4
M5
Rated
Current Weight
(lb)
(A)
Dimensions
[W x L x H] (in)
Mounting
Drive
Filter
Dimensions Mounting Mounting
[Y x X] (mm) Screw A
Screw
200 V Single-Phase Units
200 V Three-Phase Units

2A0001
FS23637-8-07
7.3
0.88
2.8 x 6.7 x 1.6
2.0 x 6.1
M4
M5
2A0002
FS23637-8-07
7.3
0.88
2.8 x 6.7 x 1.6
2.0 x 6.1
M4
M5
2A0004
FS23637-8-07
7.3
0.88
2.8 x 6.7 x 1.6
2.0 x 6.1
M4
M5
2A0006
FS23637-8-07
7.3
0.88
2.8 x 6.7 x 1.6
2.0 x 6.1
M4
M5
2A0010
FS23637-14-07
14
1.28
4.4 x 6.7 x 1.8
3.6 x 6.1
M4
M5
2A0012
FS23637-14-07
14
1.28
4.4 x 6.7 x 1.8
3.6 x 6.1
M4
M5
2A0020
FS23637-24-07
24
1.98
5.7 x 6.9 x 2.0
4.7 x 6.1
M4
M5

4A0001
FS23639-5-07
1.10
4.4 x 6.7 x 1.8
3.6 x 6.1
M4
M5
4A0002
FS23639-5-07
1.10
4.4 x 6.7 x 1.8
3.6 x 6.1
M4
M5
4A0004
FS23639-5-07
1.10
4.4 x 6.7 x 1.8
3.6 x 6.1
M4
M5
4A0005
FS23639-10-07
10
1.54
4.4 x 6.7 x 1.8
3.6 x 6.1
M4
M5
4A0007
FS23639-10-07
10
1.54
4.4 x 6.7 x 1.8
3.6 x 6.1
M4
M5
4A0009
FS23639-10-07
10
1.54
4.4 x 6.7 x 1.8
3.6 x 6.1
M4
M5
4A0011
FS23639-15-07
15
1.98
5.7 x 6.9 x 2.0
4.7 x 6.3
M4
M5
252

W
Y
L
X
LINE
LOAD
A
PE
Figure C.5 EMC Filter Dimensions
n DC Link Chokes for IEC/EN 61000-3-2 Compliance

Table C.6 DC Link Chokes for Harmonics Reduction
Drive Model
DC Link Choke
Model
Rating
200V Three-Phase Units

2A0004
2A0006
UZDA-B
5.4 A
8 mH
4A0004
Note:
UZDA-B

4A0002
3.2 A
28 mH
Models not listed in the above table do not require a DC link choke for EMC compliance.
C
253
C.3 UL Standards
C.3
UL Standards
u UL Standards Compliance
The UL/cUL mark applies to products in the United States and Canada indicates that UL has
performed product testing and evaluation and determined that their stringent standards for
product safety have been met. For a product to receive UL certification, all components inside
that product must also receive UL certification.
Figure C.6 UL/cUL Mark
This drive is tested in accordance with UL standard UL508C, E131457 and complies with UL
requirements. The following conditions must be met to maintain compliance when using this
drive in combination with other equipment:
n Installation Area
Do not install the drive to an area greater than pollution severity 2 (UL standard).
n Ambient Temperature
n Main Circuit Terminal Wiring

Yaskawa recommends using closed-loop crimp terminals on all drive models. UL/cUL
approval requires the use of UL Listed closed-loop crimp terminals when wiring the drive
main circuit terminals. Use only the tools recommended by the terminal manufacturer for
crimping. The wire gauges listed in Table C.7, Table C.8, and Table C.9 are Yaskawa
recommendations. Refer to local codes for proper wire gauge selections.
254
C.3 UL Standards
Table C.7 Wire Gauge and Torque Specifications
Drive
Model
BA0001
BA0002
BA0003
BA0006
BA0010
Terminal
Recomm. Gauge
AWG, kcmil
Wire Range
AWG, kcmil
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
14
18 to 14
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
14
18 to 14
, 1, 2
18 to 14
B1, B2
18 to 14
14
18 to 14
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
12
14 to 10
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
14
14 to 10
, 1, 2
14 to 10
B1, B2
14 to 10
10
14 to 10
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
10
14 to 10
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
14
14 to 10
, 1, 2
14 to 10
B1, B2
14 to 10
10
14 to 10
Screw Size
Tightening
Torque
Nm (lb.in.)
M3.5
0.8 to 1.0
(7.1 to 8.9)
M4
1.2 to 1.5
(10.6 to 13.3)
M4
1.2 to 1.5
(10.6 to 13.3)
Drive
Model
2A0001
2A0002
2A0004
2A0006
2A0010
Recomm. Gauge
AWG, kcmil
Wire Range
AWG, kcmil
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
14
18 to 14
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
14
18 to 14
, 1, 2
18 to 14
B1, B2
18 to 14
14
18 to 14
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
14
14 to 10
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
14
14 to 10
, 1, 2
14 to 10
B1, B2
14 to 10
10
14 to 10
Terminal
Screw Size
Tightening
Torque
Nm (lb.in.)
M3.5
0.8 to 1.0
(7.1 to 8.9)
M4
1.2 to 1.5
(10.6 to 13.3)
C
255
C.3 UL Standards
Drive
Model
2A0012
Recomm. Gauge
AWG, kcmil
Wire Range
AWG, kcmil
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
12
14 to 10
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
14
14 to 10
, 1, 2
14 to 10
14 to 10
Terminal
B1, B2
2A0020
10
14 to 10
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
10
14 to 10
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
10
14 to 10
, 1, 2
14 to 10
14 to 10
10
14 to 10
B1, B2
Screw Size
Tightening
Torque
Nm (lb.in.)
M4
1.2 to 1.5
(10.6 to 13.3)
M4
1.2 to 1.5
(10.6 to 13.3)
Screw Size
Tightening
Torque
Nm (lb.in.)
M4
1.2 to 1.5
(10.6 to 13.3)
M4
1.2 to 1.5
(10.6 to 13.3)
M4
1.2 to 1.5
(10.6 to 13.3)

Drive
Model
4A0001
4A0002
4A0004
4A0005
4A0007
4A0009
4A0011
Recomm. Gauge
AWG, kcmil
Wire Range
AWG, kcmil
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
14
14 to 10
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
14
14 to 10
, 1, 2
14 to 10
Terminal
B1, B2
256
14 to 10
14 to 10
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
14
14 to 10
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
14
14 to 10
, 1, 2
14 to 10
14 to 10
10
14 to 10
B1, B2
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
12
14 to 10
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
14
14 to 10
, 1, 2
14 to 10
14 to 10
10
14 to 10
B1, B2
Note:
14
Use crimp insulated terminals or insulated tubing for wiring these connections. Wires should have a
continuous maximum allowable temperature of 75 C 600 V UL approved vinyl sheathed insulation.
Ambient temperature should not exceed 30 C.
C.3 UL Standards
Closed-Loop Crimp Terminal Recommendations
Yaskawa recommends crimp terminals made by JST and Tokyo DIP for the insulation cap.
Table C.10 matches the wire gauges and terminal screw sizes with Yaskawa-recommended
crimp terminals, tools, and insulation caps. Refer to the appropriate Wire Gauge and Torque
Specifications table for the wire gauge and screw size for your drive model. Place orders with
a Yaskawa representative or the Yaskawa sales department.
The closed-loop crimp terminal sizes and values listed in Table C.10 are Yaskawa
recommendations. Refer to local codes for proper selections.
Table C.10 Closed-Loop Crimp Terminal Sizes
Wire Gauge
Terminal
Screws
Crimp
Terminal
Model
Number
18 AWG
M3.5
16 AWG
M3.5
14 AWG
12 / 10 AWG
<1>
Tool
Machine No.
Die Jaw
Insulation
Cap
Model No.
Code <1>
R1.25-3.5
YA-4
AD-900
TP-003
100-066-217
R1.25-3.5
YA-4
AD-900
TP-003
100-066-217
M3.5
R2-3.5
YA-4
AD-900
TP-003
100-066-218
M4
R2-4
YA-4
AD-900
TP-003
100-054-028
M4
R5.5-4
YA-4
AD-900
TP-005
100-054-029
Codes refer to a set of three crimp terminals and three insulation caps. Prepare input and output wiring using
two sets for each connection.
Example: Models with 14 AWG for both input and output require one set for input terminals and one set for
output terminals, so the user should order two sets of [100-066-218].
Note:
Consider the amount of voltage drop when selecting wire gauges. Increase the wire gauge when the
voltage drop is greater than 2% of motor rated voltage. Ensure the wire gauge is suitable for the terminal
block. Use the following formula to calculate the amount of voltage drop:
Line drop voltage (V) = 3 wire resistance (/km) wire length (m) current (A) 10-3
n Factory Recommended Branch Circuit Protection

Branch circuit protection shall be provided by any of the following according to Table C.11.
Non-time Delay Class J, T, or CC fuses.
Time Delay Class J, T, CC, or RK5 fuses.
Semiconductor fuses.
Molded Case Circuit Breakers (MCCB).
Yaskawa recommends installing one of the following types of branch circuit protection to
maintain compliance with UL508C. Semiconductor protective type fuses are preferred.
C
257
C.3 UL Standards
Table C.11 Factory Recommended Drive Branch Circuit Protection
Drive
Model
Time Delay Fuses

Bussmann
Non-time
Semiconductor
Class J, T,
Delay
Class RK5 Fuse Part Number
or CC
Fuse Rating
(Fuse Ampere)
Fuse Rating Fuse Rating
(A) <1>
(A) <3>
<4>
(A) <2>
MCCB <5>
Rating (A)
Minimum
Enclosure
Volume (in3)
200 V Class Single-Phase Drives

BA0001
3.5
FWH-25A14F (25)
15
600
BA0002
10
FWH-25A14F (25)
15
600
BA0003
20
10
15
FWH-60B (60)
15
600
BA0006
40
20
30
FWH-80B (80)
30
1152
BA0010
40
35
45
FWH-100B (100)
50
1152
200 V Class Three-Phase Drives

2A0001
1.5
FWH-25A14F (25)
15
600
2A0002
6 <6>
FWH-25A14F (25)
15
600
2A0004
15 <7>
FWH-25A14F (25)
15
600
2A0006
20
10
15
FWH-25A14F (25)
15
1152
2A0010
25
15
20
FWH-70B (70)
25
1152
2A0012
25
20
30
FWH-70B (70)
30
1152
2A0020
40
40
50
FWH-90B (90)
60
1152
1152
400 V Class Three-Phase Drives

4A0001
FWH-40B (40)
15
4A0002
3.5
FWH-40B (40)
15
1152
4A0004
15 <7>
FWH-50B (50)
15
1152
4A0005
20 <8>
10
10
FWH-70B (70)
15
1152
4A0007
25 <9>
12
15
FWH-70B (70)
20
1152
4A0009
25
15
20
FWH-90B (90)
20
1152
4A0011
30
20
30
FWH-90B (90)
35
1152
<6>
<7>
Maximum 300% of drive input current rating for any Class J, T, or CC fuse except for models 2A0002, 2A0004,
4A0004, 4A0005, and 4A0007.
Maximum 175% of drive input current rating for any Class J, T, or CC fuse.
Maximum 225% of drive input current rating for any Class RK5 fuse.
When using semiconductor fuses, Bussmann FWH are required for UL compliance.
Maximum MCCB Rating is 15 A or 200% of drive input current rating, whichever is larger. MCCB voltage
rating must be 600 Vac or greater. Additionally, when using MCCBs for protection, the drive must be installed
in a ventilated enclosure with minimum volume according the Minimum Enclosure Volume column.
Model 2A0002 requires Mersen (Ferraz) part number A6T6 for compliance.
Models 2A0004 and 4A0004 require Mersen (Ferraz) part number A6T15 for compliance.
258
<1>
<2>
<3>
<4>
<5>
C.3 UL Standards
<8>
<9>
C
259
C.3 UL Standards
n Low Voltage Wiring for Control Circuit Terminals

Wire low voltage wires with NEC Class 1 circuit conductors. Refer to national state or local
codes for wiring. The external power supply shall be a UL-Listed Class 2 power source or
equivalent.
Table C.12 Control Circuit Terminal Power Supply
Input / Output
Multi-function digital inputs
Terminal Signal
Power Supply Specifications
S1, S2, S3, S4, S5, SC
Use the internal power supply of the drive.

Use class 2 for external power supply.
+V, A1, AC
Use the internal power supply of the drive.

Use class 2 for external power supply.
Main frequency reference
n Drive Short-Circuit Rating

This drive has undergone the UL short-circuit test, which certifies that during a short circuit
in the power supply the current flow will not rise above 31,000 amps maximum at 240 V for
200 V class drives and 480 V for 400 V class drives.
The MCCB and breaker protection and fuse ratings shall be equal to or greater than the
short-circuit tolerance of the power supply being used.
Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 31,000 RMS symmetrical
amperes for 240 V in 200 V class drives (up to 480 V for 400 V class drives) motor overload
protection.
u Drive Motor Overload Protection

Set parameter E2-01 (motor rated current) to the appropriate value to enable motor overload
protection. The internal motor overload protection is UL listed and in accordance with the
NEC and CEC.
n E2-01: Motor Rated Current

Setting Range: Model Dependent
Default Setting: Model Dependent
Parameter E2-01 (motor rated current) protects the motor if parameter L1-01 is not set to 0
(default is 1, standard induction motor protection enabled).
n L1-01: Motor Overload Protection Selection

The drive has an electronic overload protection function (oL1) based on time, output current
and output frequency, which protects the motor from overheating. The electronic thermal
overload function is UL-recognized, so it does not require an external thermal overload relay
for single motor operation.
This parameter selects the motor overload curve used according to the type of motor applied.
260
C.3 UL Standards
Table C.13 Overload Protection Settings
Setting
Description
Disabled
General Purpose Motor (Standard Fan-Cooled) (default)
Drive Dedicated Motor with a Speed Range of 1:10
Disable the electronic overload protection (L1-01 = 0: Disabled) and wire each motor with its
own motor thermal overload when connecting the drive to more than one motor for
simultaneous operation.
Enable the motor overload protection (L1-01 = 1 or 2) when connecting the drive to a single
motor unless there is another means of preventing motor thermal overload. The electronic
thermal overload function causes an oL1 fault, which shuts off the output of the drive and
prevents additional overheating of the motor. The motor temperature is continually calculated
as long as the drive is powered up.
Setting L1-01 = 1 selects a motor with limited cooling capability below rated (base) speed
when running at 100% load. The oL1 function derates the motor when it is running below
base speed.
Setting L1-01 = 2 selects a motor capable of cooling itself over a 10:1 speed range when
running at 100% load. The oL1 function derates the motor when it is running at 1/10 or less
of its rated speed.
n L1-02: Motor Overload Protection Time

Setting Range: 0.1 to 5.0 Minutes
Factory Default: 1.0 Minutes
The L1-02 parameter sets the allowed operation time before the oL1 fault occurs when the
drive is running at 60 Hz and 150% of the full load amp rating (E2-01) of the motor. Adjusting
the value of L1-02 can shift the set of oL1 curves up the Y-axis of the diagram below but will
not change the shape of the curves.
C
261
C.3 UL Standards
Operation time (minutes)
10
7
Cold start
(characteristics when an
overload occurs at a
complete stop)
3
1
Hot start
(characteristics when an
overload occurs during
continuous operation at 100%)
0.4
0.1
0
100
150
200
Motor current (%)

E2-01 = 100% motor current
Figure C.7 Motor Overload Protection Time
262
Index
2-Wire Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
2-Wire Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
3-Wire Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
3-Wire Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91, 224
3-Wire Sequence Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Allowable Frequency Fluctuation . . . . . . . . .201, 203

Allowable Voltage Fluctuation. . . . . . . . . . . .201, 203
Altitude Derating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Ambient Temperature Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . .211, 232
Analog Filter Time Constant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Analog Input Filter Time Constant . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Numerics
A/D Conversion Error. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128, 131

A1-01. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117, 215
A1-03. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88, 92, 215
A1-04. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117, 151, 215
A1-05. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117, 151, 215
A1 Initialization Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Accel/Decel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Accel/Decel Ramp Hold. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Accel/Decel Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Accel/Decel Time 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Acceleration/Deceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92, 94
Acceleration Time 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93, 217
Acceleration Time 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Access Level Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117, 215
Accumulated Operation Time. . . . . . . . . . . . .110, 237
Accumulated Operation Time Selection . . . . . . . 234
Accumulated Operation Time Setting . . . . . . . . . 234
Alarm Causes and Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Alarm Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Alarm Outputs for Maintenance Monitors . . . . . 169
Alarms and Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
b1-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88, 100, 152, 216

b1-02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90, 91, 152, 216
b1-03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92, 93
b1-04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159, 216
b1-07 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
b1-08 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
b1-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
b1-17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
b1 Operation Mode Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
b2-02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92, 157, 217
b2-03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157, 217
b2-04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92, 157, 217
b2 DC Injection Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Baseblock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Baseblock Command (N.C.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Baseblock Command (N.O.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
bb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129, 141
Braking Resistor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Braking Resistor, Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Braking Resistor Overheat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Buzzing Sound from Motor at 2 kHz . . . . . . . . . . 158
263
Index
C
C1-01. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84, 85, 92, 159
C1-02. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
C1-09. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93, 217
C1 Acceleration and Deceleration Times . . . . . . . . . . . 217
C2-01. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
C2-01 through C2-04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
C2-02. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
C2-03. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
C2-04. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
C2 S-Curve Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
C3-01. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
C3-02. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
C3 Slip Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
C4-01. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125, 153
C4 Torque Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
C6-02. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67, 125, 156, 157, 159, 160, 219
C6-03. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
C6-04. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
C6-05. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157, 219
C6 Carrier Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Cable Length Between Drive and Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
CALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129, 141
Cannot Change Parameter Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Can Not Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129, 142
Capacitor Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110, 237
Capacitor Maintenance Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Carrier Frequency Lower Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Carrier Frequency Proportional Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Carrier Frequency Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Carrier Frequency Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125, 219
Carrier Frequency Setting Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129, 148
Carrier Frequency Upper Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
CE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128, 129, 130, 141
CE mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
clock error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Clock Fault. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Closed-Loop Crimp Terminal Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Coast to Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
CoF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128, 130
Comm. Fault Detection Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Communication Parity Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Communication Speed Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Communications Test Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Connected Machinery Vibrates When Motor Rotates 157
264
Control Circuit Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52

Control Circuit Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Control Circuit Input Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Control Circuit Output Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Control Circuit Terminal Block Functions . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Control Circuit Terminal Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Cooling Fan Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Cooling Fan Maintenance Setting (Operation Time) . 235
Cooling Fan Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
CPF02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
CPF06 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
CPF08 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
CPF20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
CPF21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
CPF22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128, 131
CPF23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128, 132
CPF24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128, 132
CrST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129, 142
C Tuning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Current Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110, 237
Current Offset Fault. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128, 130
D
d1-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97, 100
d1-02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
d1-03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
d1-04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
d1 Frequency Reference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
d2-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158, 220
d2-02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
d2 Frequency Upper and Lower Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
d3-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157, 221
d3-01 through d3-04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
d3-02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
d3-04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157, 221
d3 Jump Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
d4-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
d4 Frequency Reference Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
DC Bus Pre-Charge Relay Maintenance Setting . . . . . 235
DC Bus Undervoltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139, 226
DC Bus Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110, 235
DC Injection Braking at start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
DC Injection Braking at Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
DC Injection Braking Current. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157, 217
DC Injection Braking Time/DC Excitation Time at Start
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Index
Deceleration Time 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93, 217
Deceleration Time 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Digital Operator Display Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
DIP Switch S1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Down Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
d References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Drive/kVA Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Drive Baseblock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Drive Capacity Setting Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Drive Capacity Signal Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Drive Cooling Fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Drive Dedicated Motor (Constant Torque, 1:10). . . . . 109
Drive Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79, 80, 81
Drive Motor Overload Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Drive Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128, 136
Drive Ready. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Drive Short-Circuit Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Drive Slave Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Drive Status Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Drive Transmit Wait Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Drive Unit Setting Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Drive Watt Loss Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
During Baseblock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
During Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Dynamic Braking Resistor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
E
E1-04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155, 156, 158
E1-06 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
E1-08 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125, 153
E1-09 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152, 153, 158, 159
E1-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125, 153, 156
E1 V/f Pattern Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
E2-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108, 125, 222, 260
E2-02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104, 125, 222
E2-03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105, 125, 223
E2-05 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105, 223
E2 Motor Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
EEPROM Data Error. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
EEPROM Serial Communication Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
EEPROM Write Error. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
EF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129, 142
EF0. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
EF1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132, 143
EF1 to EF5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
EF2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132, 143
EF3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132, 143

EF4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132, 143
EF5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132, 143
Electrical Thermal Motor Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
EMC Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Err. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
European Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Excessive Motor Oscillation and Erratic Rotation . . . 157
External Digital Operator Connection Fault . . . . . . . . . 137
External Fault (user selection possible) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
External Search Command 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
External Search Command 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
F
Fast-stop (N.C.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Fast-Stop (N.O.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Fast-stop Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Fault. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Fault Causes and Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Fault Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Fault Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Fault History Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Fault Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Fault Reset Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127, 128
FLASH memory error. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
FLASH Memory Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Forward/Reverse Run Command Input Error. . . . . . . . 142
Forward Run Command (2-Wire sequence) . . . . . . . . . 225
Fref/Fout Agree 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Frequency (FOUT) Detection 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Frequency (FOUT) Detection 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Frequency Reference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110, 235
Frequency Reference 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97, 220
Frequency Reference 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Frequency Reference Hold Function Selection . . . . . . 221
Frequency Reference Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Frequency Reference Selection 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Frequency Reference Setting Method Selection . . . . . 234
Frequency Reference Upper Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
265
Index
Frequency Reference Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Fuse (CE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246, 247
Fuse Holder (CE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Fuse Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
G
General-Purpose Motor (Standard Self-Cooled) . . . . . 109
General Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Ground Fault Interrupter Activates When Drive is Running
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Ground Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
H
H1-01. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
H1-02. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
H1-03. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
H1-04. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
H1-05. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41, 223
H1 Multi-Function Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
H1 Multi-Function Digital Input Selections . . . . . . . . . 224
H2-01. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105, 225
H2 Multi-Function Digital Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
H2 Multi-Function Digital Output Settings. . . . . . . . . . 225
H3-01. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63, 152, 226
H3-01 Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
H3-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126, 157
H3 Analog Input A1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
H4-01. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
H4-03. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
H4 Multi-Function Analog Output AM . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
H5-01. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
H5-02. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
H5-03. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
H5-04. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
H5-05. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
H5-06. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
H5-07. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
H5-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
H5-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
H5 MEMOBUS/Modbus Communications . . . . . . . . . 227
Heatsink Cooling Fan Operation Selection . . . . . . . . . . 232
Heatsink Overheat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128, 129, 143
Heatsink Temperature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Heavy Duty Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Hunting Prevention Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Hunting Prevention Gain Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
266
I
I/O Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
IGBT Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111, 237
IGBT Maintenance Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Initialize Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88, 215
Initial Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Input Current (A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201, 203
Input Fuses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Input Phase Loss. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128, 138
Input Terminals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Input Terminal Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Input Voltage Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Inrush Prevention Circuit Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165, 167
Installation Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Installation Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Installation Spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Installing Multiple Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Internal Dynamic Braking Resistor Protection. . . . . . . . .65
Internal Dynamic Braking Resistor Protection Selection
(ERF type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
J
Jog Frequency Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jog Reference Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jump Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jump Frequency 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jump Frequency 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jump Frequency Width. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
220
224
126
221
221
221
L
L1-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108, 109, 110, 229, 260, 261
L1-02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108, 229, 261
L1-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
L1 Motor Protection Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
L2-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
L2 Momentary Power Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
L3-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
L3-01 through L3-06. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
L3-02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155, 158, 230
L3-04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156, 230
L3-05 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
L3-06 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155, 230
L3 Stall Prevention Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
L4-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
L4 Frequency Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Index
L5-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
L5 Fault Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
L6-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
L6-02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
L6-03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
L6 Overtorque Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
L8: Hardware Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
L8-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
L8-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
L8-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211, 232
L8-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
L8-29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
L8-35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
L8-38 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158, 232
LED Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111, 237
LED Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22, 74, 75, 90
LF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128, 133
LO/RE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76, 85, 114
LOCAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Local/Remote Run Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Local/Remote Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Low Voltage Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Low Voltage Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
L Protection Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
M
Magnetic Flux Compensation Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Main Circuit Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42, 51
Main Circuit Terminal Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Main Circuit Terminal Power Supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Main Circuit Terminals Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Main Circuit Terminal Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24, 254
Main Frequency Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Main Frequency Reference Input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Maintenance Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Master Speed Reference Lower Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Maximum Motor Size Allowed (HP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Maximum Motor Size Allowed (kW). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Maximum Output Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
MEMOBUS/Modbus Communication Error . . .128, 129,
130,
141
MEMOBUS/Modbus Communications Test Mode
Complete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
MEMOBUS/Modbus Communications Test Mode Error
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
MEMOBUS/Modbus Error Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Memobus/Modbus Error Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

MEMOBUS/Modbus Test Mode Complete . . . . . . . . . 129
MEMOBUS/Modbus Test Mode Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Mid Output Voltage A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Minimum Output Frequency. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158, 159
Minimum Output Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Minor Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Minor Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127, 128
Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Momentary Power Loss Operation Selection . . . . . . . . 229
Monitor Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Motor Does Not Operate When an External Run Command
is Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Motor Does Not Operate When the RUN Button on the
Digital Operator is Pressed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Motor Does Not Rotate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Motor Hunting and Oscillation Control Parameters . . 126
Motor Hunting Occurs When Operating With a Light Load
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Motor is Too Hot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Motor Line-to-Line Resistance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105, 223
Motor No-Load Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105, 223
Motor Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128, 135
Motor Overload Protection Selection . . . . . . 108, 229, 260
Motor Overload Protection Time. . . . . . . . . . 108, 229, 261
Motor Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Motor protection operation time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Motor Rated Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104, 108, 222, 260
Motor Rated Slip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104, 222
Motor Rotates After the Drive Output is Shut Off . . . 157
Motor Rotates Faster Than the Frequency Reference. 155
Motor Rotates in One Direction Only. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Motor Stalls During Acceleration or With Large Loads154
...
Motor Stops During Acceleration or When a Load is
Connected. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Motor Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Multi-Function Analog 1 (Terminal AM Monitor
Selection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Multi-Function Analog Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Multi-Function Contact Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Multi-Function Contact Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Multi-Function Digital Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Multi-Function Digital Input Terminal S1 Function
Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
267
Index
Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Multi-Function Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Multi-Function Input Selection Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Multi-Function Input Setting Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Multiple Drive Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Multi-Step Speed Operation (4-Step Speed). . . . . . . . . . .97
Multi-Step Speed Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
N
n1-02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125, 233
n1 Hunting Prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
n3: Overexcitation Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
n3-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
n Advanced Performance Set Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Noise From the Drive or Output Lines When the Drive is
Powered On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
No-Load Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Normal Duty Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Number of Auto Restart Attempts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
O
o1 Display Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
o2-02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153, 233
o2-04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
o2-05 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
o2 Multi-Function Selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
o4-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
o4-02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
o4-03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
o4-05 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
o4-07 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
o4-09 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
o4-11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
o4 Maintenance Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
oC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128, 133
oFA01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128, 135
oH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129, 143
oH1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128, 135
oL1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128, 135
oL2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128, 136, 158
oL3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128, 129, 137, 144
268
oPE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
oPE01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129, 147
oPE02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129, 147
oPE03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129, 147
oPE05 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129, 148
oPE10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129, 148
oPE11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129, 148
Open-Chassis IP20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 33
Operating with the Load Connected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Operation Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127, 129
Operator Connection Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Operator Programming Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Operator Related Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
oPr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128, 137
Option Card Fault. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Option Unit Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Oscillation or Hunting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Output Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110, 235
Output Current (A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201, 203
Output Frequency. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110, 235
Output Frequency is not as High as Frequency Reference
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Output Phase Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128, 133
Output Terminal Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110, 236
Output Voltage Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110, 235
ov . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128, 129, 137, 144
Overcurrent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128, 133
Overexcitation Deceleration Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Overheat 1 (Heatsink Overheat). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Overload Tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201, 203
Overtorque 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129, 144
Overtorque Detection 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128, 137
Overvoltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128, 129, 137
ov Occurs When Starting a Fan or Motor Speed Loss
Occurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
P
Parameter Range Setting Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Parameter Setting Range Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Parameter Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
PASS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129, 145
Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Password Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Password Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Peak Hold Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111, 237
Peripheral Devices Affected by Drive Operation . . . . 159
Index
PF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128, 138
Phase Order Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Poor Speed Control Accuracy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Power Specifications 200 V Class Models . . . . . . . . . . 201
Power Specifications 400 V Class Models . . . . . . . . . . 203
Previous Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110, 237
Programming Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79, 81, 82
Protective Covers, Reattaching. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Protective Covers, Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44, 196
PWM Feedback Data Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
PWM Feedback Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
R
RAM Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128, 131
Ramp to Stop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Rated Frequency. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201, 203
Rated Output Capacity (kVA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Rated Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201, 203
REMOTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Restart Enabled. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Reverse Direction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Reverse Operation Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Reverse Run Command (2-Wire sequence) . . . . . . . . . 225
rH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128, 139
RTS Control Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Run command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
Run Command at Power Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Run Command Input Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Run Command Input Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Run Command Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152, 216
Run Command Selection during Program . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Run Command Selection Error. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
S
S1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
S2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
Safety Hazard Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
S-Curve Characteristic at Accel End. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
S-Curve Characteristic at Accel Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
S-Curve Characteristic at Decel End. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
S-Curve Characteristic at Decel Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
S-Curve Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94, 126
SE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129, 145
Serial Communication Reference Selection . . . . . . . . . 224
Serial Communication Transmission Error . . . . . . 129, 141

Setup Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81, 86
Shielded Twisted-Pair Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Side-by-Side Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Sinking/Sourcing Mode Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Slip Compensation Gain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Slip Compensation Primary Delay Time . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Soft Charge Circuit Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Soft Current Limit Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Software No. (Flash) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Software No. (ROM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Software Number (Flash). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Software Number (ROM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Speed Agreement Detection Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Speed Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Stall Prevention. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Stall Prevention During Deceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Stall Prevention Level during Acceleration . . . . . . . . . 230
Stall Prevention Level during Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Stall Prevention Selection during Acceleration . . . . . . 230
Stall Prevention Selection during Deceleration . . . . . . 230
Stall Prevention Selection during Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Standard Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39, 40
STOP Key Function Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Stopping Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Stopping Method After Communication Error. . . . . . . 228
T
Terminal A1 Bias Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Terminal A1 Gain Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Terminal A1 Input Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Terminal A1 Signal Level Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Terminal Block Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Terminal Board Wiring Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Terminal M1 thru M2 Function Selection (relay) . . . . 105
Terminal MA, MB and MC Function Selection (relay) 105,
225
Test Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Tightening Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Timing Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Torque Compensation Gain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125, 218
Torque Detection 1 (N.O.). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Torque Detection 2 (N.O.). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Torque Detection Level 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Torque Detection Selection 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Torque Detection Time 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
269
Index
Torque Specifications, Single Phase 200 V Class . 47, 255
Torque Specifications, Three Phase 200 V Class . 47, 255
Torque Specifications, Three Phase 400 V Class . 48, 256
Transistor Input Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60, 61
U
U1-01. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110, 152, 155, 235
U1-02. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110, 235
U1-03. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110, 235
U1-06. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110, 235
U1-07. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110, 151, 235
U1-09. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
U1-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
U1-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110, 236
U1-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110, 236
U1-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110, 236
U1-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110, 236
U1-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110, 236
U1 Operation Status Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
U2-01. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110, 237
U2-02. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110, 149, 237
U2 Fault History. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
U2 Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
U4: Maintenance Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
U4-01. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
U4-04. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
U4-05. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110, 237
U4-06. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
U4-07. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111, 237
U4-08. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111, 237
U4-09. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111, 237
U4-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111, 237
UL Standards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
U Monitors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Undervoltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128, 129, 145
Undervoltage 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Unexpected Noise from Connected Machinery . . . . . . 157
Up Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
User Monitor Selection After Power Up . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Uv. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129, 145
Uv1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128, 139
Uv3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128, 140
Verify Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
W
Watchdog Circuit Exception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128, 131
Watt Loss 200 V Class Single Phase Models . . . . . . . . 209
Watt Loss 200 V Class Three Phase Models . . . . . . . . 209
Watt Loss 400 V Class Three Phase Models . . . . . . . . 209
Wire Gauge, Single Phase 200 V Class . . . . . . . . . . 47, 255
Wire Gauge, Three Phase 200 V Class. . . . . . . . . . . 47, 255
Wire Gauge, Three Phase 400 V Class. . . . . . . . . . . 48, 256
Wire Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Wiring Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Wiring Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Z
Zero Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
V
V/f Data Setting Error. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129, 148
V/f Pattern Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
270
Index
271
Revision History
The revision dates and the numbers of the revised manuals appear on the bottom of the back cover.
Example:
MANUAL NO.
TOEP C710606 26A <1>
Revision number
Published in Japan July 2009
Date of publication
DATE
Date of Publication
Revision
Number
Section
Front Cover,
Spine
All
May 2015
<4>
Chapter 3
Revision: Format and address

Revision: Reviewed and corrected documentation
Chapter 2
Revision: Ambient Temperature
Appendix A
Revision: Ambient Temperature

Revision: Standards
Appendix C
Addition: Fuse List for European Standards

Addition: Ambient Temperature for UL Standards
Revision: Wire Gauge and Torque Specifications for UL
Standards
Revision: Standards
Revision: Low Voltage Wiring for Control Circuit
Terminals
Back Cover
Revision: Address
Front Cover
Revision: Format
Chapter 3
Chapter 7
Appendix C
272
Addition: Safety message regarding motor leads
Back Cover
<3>
<2>

Revision: UL Factory Recommended Branch Circuit
Protection
All
December 2011
Revision: Format
Appendix C
All
March 2014
Revised Content

Revision: Precautions on installing a leakage breaker
Revision: Wire Gauge and Torque Specifications
Revision: Wire Gauge and Torque Specifications
Revision: Closed-Loop Crimp Terminal Size
Revision: Fuse list
Back Cover
Revision: Format and address
July 2009
<1>
Back Cover
Revision: Address
February 2008
First Edition
No.5-5140182YAI
YASKAWA AC Drive-J1000
Compact V/f Control Drive
Quick Start Guide

YASKAWA AMERICA, INC.
2121, Norman Drive South, Waukegan, IL 60085, U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-YASKAWA (927-5292) or 1-847-887-7000 Fax: 1-847-887-7310
http://www.yaskawa.com
DRIVE CENTER (INVERTER PLANT)

2-13-1, Nishimiyaichi, Yukuhashi, Fukuoka, 824-8511, Japan
Phone: 81-930-25-3844 Fax: 81-930-25-4369
http://www.yaskawa.co.jp
YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION

New Pier Takeshiba South Tower, 1-16-1, Kaigan, Minatoku, Tokyo, 105-6891, Japan
Phone: 81-3-5402-4502 Fax: 81-3-5402-4580
http://www.yaskawa.co.jp
YASKAWA ELTRICO DO BRASIL LTDA.

777, Avenida Piraporinha, Diadema, So Paulo, 09950-000, Brasil
Phone: 55-11-3585-1100 Fax: 55-11-3585-1187
http://www.yaskawa.com.br
YASKAWA EUROPE GmbH
185, Hauptstrae, Eschborn, 65760, Germany

Phone: 49-6196-569-300 Fax: 49-6196-569-398
http://www.yaskawa.eu.com
YASKAWA ELECTRIC KOREA CORPORATION

9F, Kyobo Securities Bldg., 26-4, Yeouido-dong, Yeongdeungpo-gu, Seoul, 150-737, Korea
Phone: 82-2-784-7844 Fax: 82-2-784-8495
http://www.yaskawa.co.kr
YASKAWA ELECTRIC (SINGAPORE) PTE. LTD.

151, Lorong Chuan, #04-02A, New Tech Park, 556741, Singapore
Phone: 65-6282-3003 Fax: 65-6289-3003
http://www.yaskawa.com.sg
YASKAWA ELECTRIC (THAILAND) CO., LTD.

252/125-126, 27th Floor, Muang Thai-Phatra Tower B, Rachadapisek Road, Huaykwang, Bangkok, 10310, Thailand
Phone: 66-2693-2200 Fax: 66-2693-4200
http://www.yaskawa.co.th
YASKAWA ELECTRIC (CHINA) CO., LTD.

22F, One Corporate Avenue, No.222, Hubin Road, Shanghai, 200021, China
Phone: 86-21-5385-2200 Fax: 86-21-5385-3299
http://www.yaskawa.com.cn
YASKAWA ELECTRIC (CHINA) CO., LTD. BEIJING OFFICE

Room 1011, Tower W3 Oriental Plaza, No. 1, East Chang An Ave.,
Dong Cheng District, Beijing, 100738, China
Phone: 86-10-8518-4086 Fax: 86-10-8518-4082
YASKAWA ELECTRIC TAIWAN CORPORATION

9F, 16, Nanking E. Rd., Sec. 3, Taipei, 104, Taiwan
Phone: 886-2-2502-5003 Fax: 886-2-2505-1280
YASKAWA INDIA PRIVATE LIMITED

#17/A, Electronics City, Hosur Road, Bangalore, 560 100 (Karnataka), India
Phone: 91-80-4244-1900 Fax: 91-80-4244-1901
http://www.yaskawaindia.in
In the event that the end user of this product is to be the military and said product is to be
employed in any weapons systems or the manufacture thereof, the export will fall under the
relevant regulations as stipulated in the Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade Regulations.
Therefore, be sure to follow all procedures and submit all relevant documentation according
to any and all rules, regulations and laws that may apply.
Specifications are subject to change without notice for ongoing product modifications and
improvements.
2008-2015 YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION
MANUAL NO.
TOEP C710606 26D <4>
Published in Japan May 2015
14-10-13_YAI

YASKAWA AC Drive-J1000: Quick Start Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

YASKAWA AC Drive-J1000: Quick Start Guide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

YASKAWA AC Drive-J1000: Quick Start Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

COSMOS140182CI 2011.

Quick Start Guide

MANUAL NO. TOEP C710606 26D

Start-Up Programming &

Periodic Inspection &

Peripheral Devices &

Copyright 2008 YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

PREFACE & GENERAL SAFETY ........................9

General Safety ....................................................... 11

1.3 Component Names ................................................ 22

2. MECHANICAL INSTALLATION .........................25

2.1 Section Safety.................................................................. 26

3.4 Terminal Block Configuration.......................................... 43

3.6 Main Circuit Wiring .......................................................... 46

3.7 Control Circuit Wiring ...................................................... 52

3.8 I/O Connections ............................................................... 59

3.9 Main Frequency Reference .............................................. 62

3.10 Braking Resistor.............................................................. 64

3.11 Interlocking with Connected Machinery .......................... 66

3.12 Wiring Checklist .............................................................. 67

4. START-UP PROGRAMMING & OPERATION............. 69

4.3 The Drive and Programming Modes ................................ 79

4.4 Start-up Flowchart ........................................................... 87

4.5 Basic Operation ............................................................... 88

4.6 Powering Up the Drive ....................................................112

4.7 No-Load Operation Test Run ..........................................114

4.8 Test Run with Load Connected.......................................116

4.9 Verifying and Backing Up Parameter Settings................117

4.10 Test Run Checklist .........................................................119

5. TROUBLESHOOTING ............................................... 121

5.3 Drive Alarms, Faults, and Errors.....................................127

5.4 Fault Detection ...............................................................130

5.5 Alarm Detection ..............................................................141

5.6 Operator Programming Errors ........................................147

5.7 Diagnosing and Resetting Faults....................................149

5.8 Troubleshooting without Fault Display...........................151

6. PERIODIC INSPECTION & MAINTENANCE ........... 161

6.3 Periodic Maintenance .....................................................168

6.4 Drive Cooling Fans .........................................................171

7. PERIPHERAL DEVICES & OPTIONS ...................... 177

7.5 Options ...........................................................................198

Single/Three-Phase 200 V Class Drives ..........................201

B. PARAMETER LIST .................................................... 213

B.3 Defaults by Drive Model and Duty Rating ND/HD............238

C. STANDARDS COMPLIANCE .................................... 241

INDEX ......................................................................... 263

Yaskawa manufactures products used as components in a wide variety of industrial systems

Indicates a supplement or precaution that does not cause drive damage.

Indicates a term or definition used in this manual.

u Terms and Abbreviations

Drive: Yaskawa J1000 Series Drive

i.2 General Safety

u Supplemental Safety Information

i.2 General Safety

Electrical Shock Hazard

i.2 General Safety

Electrical Shock Hazard

i.2 General Safety

i.2 General Safety